JP2007296069A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous without reducing player's desire to play while suppressing the increase of the processing loads of a main control means in the game machine wherein a display control means controls the display of a pattern display device on the basis of a command from the main control means. <P>SOLUTION: A pachinko game machine 10 includes a main controller 271 for generally managing the game. When an operation condition is established, the main controller 271 determines the variable display time and variation display of patterns variably displayed at the pattern display device 41 and the stop patterns of respective symbol columns to be stopped and displayed finally, etc., and transmits various kinds of commands to a display controller 214. The display controller 214 determines a ready-to-win character or the like to be displayed on a display screen on the basis of the reception of the commands and controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so as to variably display the patterns. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operating port provided in a gaming area, a hit determination is made as to whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player such as a hit state. The change display of the pattern is started. If the winning determination is won, a combination of specific pictures and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state. With the transition to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out.

  As an example of the variable display of patterns, a typical display in which three pattern rows are scrolled and displayed as a scroll will be described as an example. First, the variable display of each pattern row is started, and the two pattern rows are stopped and displayed. When a combination that can be a specific picture combination is stopped on the active line, reach is reached, and when the change display of the remaining pattern row is stopped and the specific combination of pictures is finally stopped, the special game state is entered. This is the general flow. Then, in order to increase the expectation that a combination of specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed, various effects such as displaying a character separately from the patterns are generally performed during the variation display of the patterns. In recent years, a gaming machine having a specific effect (so-called premium effect) that is performed only with a predetermined probability when a winning lottery is won has also been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Further, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a lottery per specific and non-specific, and displays a combination of specific designs in the final stop display in the case of specific wins, and finally stops and displays a combination of non-specific designs in the case of non-specific hits. is there. In such a gaming machine, when winning per specific, it shifts to a specific gaming state such as a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, and when winning per non-specific, it is normal without shifting to the specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state Return to gaming state. The high probability state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the winning lottery is higher than the winning probability in the normal gaming state.

  Here, in the case of a configuration with a specific performance, not only does the player have a sense of superiority for winning the winning lottery, but also the player has a sense of superiority for the specific performance being performed. It becomes possible to dramatically improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the hit type and the combination of the picture that is displayed in the final stop are associated with each other, it is possible to play the game while expecting the combination of the specific picture to be displayed in the final stop. It is possible to suppress the game in the game from becoming monotonous.

  However, if a specific performance is performed in the case of non-specific hits, the combination of non-specific designs will be finally stopped and displayed despite the player's superiority due to the specific performance being performed, There is a possibility that the game willingness of the player who expects the combination of the specific pictures to be displayed in the final stop state, and further to shift to the specific game state after the special game state ends. Therefore, the present inventors can suppress the monotonization of the game without reducing the player's willingness to play if the specific effect can be performed only with a predetermined probability in the case of specific hit. It came to assume.

  By the way, in recent years, based on a main control device as a main control means that plays a central role in game control and a command from the main control device, that is, receiving a direct command from the main control device, or from a main control device The display control device is individually provided as a display control means for controlling the display of the picture display device in response to a command from another control device that has received the command, and is displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the main control device. The mainstream is gaming machines that diversify display effects. Then, for example, the main controller determines the variable display time for variably displaying the pattern and the stop pattern of each pattern sequence to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line, and the display control device controls the display of the pattern display device based on the determination result. A gaming machine configured to do so has been proposed.

Here, the present inventors can diversify the display effects without increasing the processing load of the main control device if the display control device determines whether or not to perform the specific effects. I thought that the monotonization of the game could be suppressed. However, when the display control device is configured to determine whether or not to perform a specific effect, for example, the display control device erroneously grasps the stop picture determined by the main control device due to the occurrence of noise or the like, and is not a specific hit. Nevertheless, it has become a new concern that the display control device decides to perform a specific effect.
JP 2005-34524 A

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and in a gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on a command from the main control means, the processing load of the main control means increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress monotonization of a game without reducing the game motivation of the player.

  Hereinafter, effective means for solving the above-described problems will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Means 1. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a stop picture to be displayed for final stop is determined, and if the determination result of the determination means is a first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot), a specific picture (odd pattern) When the determination result of the determination means is the second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific big hit), the non-specific picture (the combination of even numbers) is finally stopped Stop pattern determining means for determining a stop pattern to be displayed (a jackpot symbol table, a stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.);
A variable display time determining means (variable display time deriving function S812, etc.) for determining a variable display time until the picture is finally stopped and displayed;
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed, the special game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Special game state transition means (big-hit state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting to a state (big-hit state);
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control unit is configured to end the variation display of the pattern within the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination unit, and based on the determination result of the stop pattern determination unit at the elapse timing of the variation display time. In the gaming machine that controls the display of the pattern display device so that the stopped pattern is displayed as a final stop,
The main control means transmits a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination means and a stop pattern command indicating the stop pattern determined by the stop pattern determination means to the display control means. A transmission means (external output processing function S501),
The display control means includes identification information display means (display control processing function S1812) for displaying predetermined identification information (notice character, etc.) on the display screen until the picture is finally stopped and displayed, and the command transmission means. Identification information determination means (reach effect determination process S1904) for determining identification information to be displayed on the display screen based on the commands transmitted from
When the identification information determination means receives a determination result command indicating that it is the first result and a stop pattern command indicating that the specific pattern is to be displayed as a final stop, and when a predetermined lottery is won A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to display specific identification information (such as a premium notice character) as long as possible.

  According to the means 1, since the display control means determines the identification information to be displayed on the display screen until the picture is finally stopped and displayed, the display effect is suppressed while increasing the processing load of the main control means. Can be diversified. Only when a determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result and a stop pattern command indicating that the specific pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed are received and a predetermined lottery is won. Specific identification information is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to display the specific identification information only with a predetermined probability when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, whereas the determination result of the determination means is the first result. Not only can the player have a sense of superiority, but also the player can have a sense of superiority with respect to the display of the specific identification information, which can greatly improve the interest of the game. . Further, the main control unit transmits a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination unit to the display control unit, and in addition to receiving the stop pattern command indicating that the specific pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed. The reception of the determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result is also set as a condition for displaying the specific identification information, and for example, display control of the stop pattern indicated by the stop pattern command due to noise or the like is performed. It is possible to avoid displaying the specific identification information although the means grasps erroneously and the determination result of the determination means is not the first result. Therefore, although the specific identification information is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the gaming motivation without shifting to the specific gaming state after the special gaming state is ended.

  As a result, in a gaming machine in which the display control unit performs display control of the picture display device based on a command from the main control unit, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load on the main control unit and It is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game without reducing the game.

Mean 2. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a stop picture to be displayed for final stop is determined, and if the determination result of the determination means is a first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot), a specific picture (odd pattern) When the determination result of the determination means is the second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific big hit), the non-specific picture (the combination of even numbers) is finally stopped Stop pattern determining means for determining a stop pattern to be displayed (a jackpot symbol table, a stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.);
A variable display time determining means (variable display time deriving function S812, etc.) for determining a variable display time until the picture is finally stopped and displayed;
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed, the special game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Special game state transition means (big-hit state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting to a state (big-hit state);
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control unit is configured to end the variation display of the pattern within the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination unit, and based on the determination result of the stop pattern determination unit at the elapse timing of the variation display time. In the gaming machine that controls the display of the pattern display device so that the stopped pattern is displayed as a final stop,
Providing production means (design display device 41, annular illumination part 102, etc.) for performing a predetermined production (reach production) until the picture is finally stopped and displayed,
The main control means transmits a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination means and a stop pattern command indicating the stop pattern determined by the stop pattern determination means to the display control means. A transmission means (external output processing function S501),
The display control means includes an effect determining means (reach effect determining process S1904) for determining an effect (reach effect) to be performed by the effect means based on each command transmitted from the command transmitting means,
Only when the determination result command indicating that the effect is the first result and the stop picture command indicating that the specific picture is to be displayed in a final stop state are received and the predetermined lottery is won. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to perform a specific production (premium production).

  According to the means 2, since the display control means determines the effect to be performed until the picture is finally stopped and displayed, it is possible to diversify the effect while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main control means. It becomes possible. Only when a determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result and a stop pattern command indicating that the specific pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed are received and a predetermined lottery is won. A specific performance is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to cause a specific effect to be performed only with a predetermined probability when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, and the game with respect to the determination result of the determination means being the first result It is possible not only to give the player a sense of superiority, but also to give the player a sense of superiority with respect to the fact that the specific performance has been performed, and it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the game. Further, the main control unit transmits a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination unit to the display control unit, and in addition to receiving the stop pattern command indicating that the specific pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed. By receiving the determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result also as a condition for causing the specific effect to be performed, the display control means displays the stop pattern indicated by the stop pattern command due to noise or the like, for example. Can be grasped by mistake, and it is possible to avoid the specific effect being performed even though the determination result of the determination means is not the first result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from diminishing the game motivation without shifting to the specific game state after the special game state is ended despite the specific effect being performed.

  As a result, in a gaming machine in which the display control unit performs display control of the picture display device based on a command from the main control unit, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load on the main control unit and It is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game without reducing the game.

  Here, “determination of effect” means determining the identification information other than the stop pattern such as the character displayed on the display screen until the pattern is finally stopped and displayed, for example, the pattern is finally stopped and displayed. In the configuration including the determination of the musical sound to be output in the period up to and the movable combination, whether or not the movable combination is determined is included.

  Means 3. In the above means 1 or 2, the main control means is provided with acquisition means (start winning process S104) for acquiring information (values of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc.) when the operating condition is satisfied, The determination means uses the information acquired by the acquisition means to determine whether or not to win (big hit random number counter C1) or specific non-specific (big hit type counters C2 and C2a, big hit symbol) when starting the display of the variation of the picture The determination of the counter C2b) is performed, and the command transmission means is a determination result command indicating the first result, a hit command (big hit variation pattern command) indicating the hit, and the specification And a specific command (specific command) indicating that the display control means is separately transmitted to the display control means. The gaming machine.

  According to the means 3, information is acquired when the operating condition is established, and using this acquired information, a determination of a hit or a specific non-specific determination is performed when starting the variable display of the pattern. Then, as the determination result command indicating the first result, a winning command indicating winning and a specific command indicating specific are separately transmitted to the display control means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably avoid the specific effect being performed even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result. This is because, for example, when the display control means erroneously grasps any one of the stop picture command, the winning command, and the specific command due to noise or the like, the determination for performing the specific identification information or the specific effect is not performed.

  Means 4. In the above means 1 or 2, the main control means is provided with acquisition means (start winning process S104) for acquiring information (values of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc.) when the operating condition is satisfied, The determination means uses the information acquired by the acquisition means to determine whether or not a hit (random hit random number counter C1) is determined or specific / non-specific (big hit type counters C2 and C2a, big hit symbol) when starting the display of variation of the pattern The determination of the counter C2b) is performed, and the command transmission means indicates a specific hit command (specific command) indicating the hit and the specific as a determination result command indicating the first result. Is transmitted to the display control means.

  According to the means 4, information is acquired when the operation condition is established, and using this acquired information, determination of a hit or a specific non-specific determination is performed when starting the variable display of the pattern. Then, as the determination result command indicating the first result, a specific hit command indicating that it is a win and specific is transmitted to the display control means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid performing a specific effect even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result.

  Means 5. In the above means 1 or 2, the main control means is provided with acquisition means (start winning process S104) for acquiring information (values of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc.) when the operating condition is satisfied, When the determination means starts displaying the variation of the picture, it is determined whether it is a specific hit or a non-specific hit using the information acquired by the acquisition means (a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, C2a, a jackpot symbol) The determination of the counter C2b) is performed, and the command transmission means has a plurality of determination result commands (big hit variation pattern command, specific command) indicating the specific hit as the determination result command indicating the first result. Is transmitted to the display control means.

  According to the means 5, information is acquired when the operating condition is satisfied, and using this acquired information, it is determined whether the specific hit, non-specific hit, or off when starting the display of the variation of the pattern. Then, a plurality of determination result commands indicating specific hits are transmitted to the display control means as determination result commands indicating the first result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably avoid the specific effect being performed even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result. For example, when the display control means erroneously grasps either the stop picture command or each determination result command due to noise or the like, the decision to perform specific identification information or specific effect is not performed.

  Means 6. In the above means 1 or 2, the main control means is provided with acquisition means (start winning process S104) for acquiring information (values of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc.) when the operating condition is satisfied, The determination means uses the information acquired by the acquisition means when starting the variation display of the pattern, whether it is a specific hit or non-specific hit or not (a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, C2a, a jackpot symbol) The counter C2b) is determined, and the command transmission means sends a specific hit command (specific command) indicating the specific hit to the display control means as a determination result command indicating the first result. A gaming machine characterized by being transmitted.

  According to the means 6, information is acquired when the operating condition is established, and using this acquired information, it is determined whether the specific hit or the non-specific hit or not when starting the variable display of the pattern. And the specific hit command which shows that it is specific win is transmitted with respect to a display control means as a determination result command which shows that it is a 1st result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid performing a specific effect even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result.

  Mean 7 In any one of the above means 3 to 6, the acquisition means wins the type information (value of the jackpot type counter C2a) used when determining a specific non-specific type and at least the determination result of the determination unit. A game machine characterized by separately acquiring the pattern information (value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b) used when determining the stop symbol in the case.

  According to the means 7, when the operating condition is satisfied, the type information used when determining the specific non-specific type and the pattern information used when determining the stop pattern when the determination result of the determination means is correct And are acquired separately. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in advance as compared with the configuration in which the type determination and the stop picture determination are performed based on one information, and the storage capacity of the main control unit Can be prevented from increasing.

  Means 8. In the means 7, the picture display device displays a plurality of types of the specific picture and the non-specific picture, and the main control means displays the acquisition result of the picture information and a stop picture to be finally stopped and displayed. And stop symbol information group storage means (program ROM 522) for storing the stop symbol information group (specific symbol table, non-specific symbol table) for each type, and the stop symbol determining means When the determination result is a win, the gaming machine is characterized in that a stop picture to be finally stopped is determined based on the type information, the picture information, and the content stored in the stop picture information group storage means.

  According to the means 8, when the stop pattern information group in which the acquisition result of the pattern information and the stop pattern to be displayed in the final stop are associated is stored for each hit type, and the determination result of the determination means is hit, A stop pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is determined based on the type information, the pattern information, and the contents stored in the stop pattern information group storage means. When a plurality of types of specific designs and non-specific designs are variably displayed, if the configuration is such that the type is determined and the stop design is determined based on the information of 1, the ratio of the final stop display for each specific design is There is a possibility that the ratio of the final stop display in the case of different or non-specific is different for each non-specific pattern. Therefore, the type information used when determining the type and the pattern information used when determining the stop pattern in the case of winning are separately acquired, and the stop pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is determined based on these information By doing so, it becomes possible to equalize the proportion of each picture that is finally stopped and displayed for each hit type. In addition, in the case of winning, it is possible to relatively easily set the ratio for the specific hit and the ratio for the non-specific hit.

  Means 9. In any one of the above-described means 1 to 8, the display control means can finally stop and display the non-specific picture when a stop picture command indicating that the specific picture is to be finally stopped and displayed is received. Whether or not based on at least the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means (promotion effect processing function S1903), and when it is determined that the determination means is possible, the non-specific picture And a final stop display pattern changing means (normal reach symbol table, stop symbol change processing function S2010, etc.) for changing the stop symbol so as to be finally stopped and displayed.

  According to the means 9, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the non-specific picture may be finally stopped and displayed. By adopting such a configuration, even if a non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed, it is possible to leave room for transition to the specific gaming state after the special gaming state is finished, thereby suppressing monotonization of the game. It becomes possible. Further, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, it is determined whether or not the non-specific picture can be finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side based on at least the variable display time determined by the main control means. When possible, the display control means changes the stop picture so that the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the display control means side can determine the picture to be finally stopped and displayed, for example, whether or not to perform a suggestive effect that suggests that the determination result is the first result in or after the special gaming state It is possible to determine such as on the display control means side, and it is possible to diversify display effects displayed on the display screen. In addition, since it is configured to determine whether or not a non-specific picture can be finally stopped and displayed based on at least the variable display time determined by the main control means, the elapse timing of the variable display time and each picture string are finally stopped and displayed. It is possible to avoid harming the harmony with the timing. As a result, in the gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on the command from the main control means, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game by increasing the degree of freedom of the display control means. Become.

  Means 10. In the means 9, the identification information determining means determines that the specific effect is not performed when the final stop picture changing means changes the stop picture so that the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed. To play. Alternatively, the effect determining means determines that the specific effect is not performed when the final stop picture changing means changes the stop picture so that the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed.

  According to the means 10, when the stop picture is changed so that the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed, the determination result command indicating the first result, and the stop picture command indicating that the specific picture is finally stopped and displayed are displayed. Even if is received, the specific identification information is not displayed or the specific performance is not performed. By adopting such a configuration, display of specific identification information and specific effects only when the player can surely know that the special game state will be transitioned to after the special game state has ended through the final stop display of the specific pattern. In spite of the display of specific identification information and the specific performance being performed, the player's superiority has increased, but the non-specific design has been finally stopped and the player's superiority has decreased. It becomes possible to avoid that.

Means 11. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) that displays the patterns in a variable manner so that a plurality of pattern rows are cyclically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the stop pattern of each pattern row is determined, and if the determination result of the determination means is the first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot), a specific pattern (odd pattern) ) Is the second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific big hit) so that the combination of) is finally stopped and displayed on the preset active lines (effective lines L1 to L5). In this case, stop pattern determining means (a jackpot symbol table, stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.) for determining a stop symbol of each symbol row so that a combination of non-specific symbols (even number symbols) is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line. )When,
Fluctuation display time determining means (variable display time deriving function S812, etc.) for determining a variable display time until the last stop display of each picture sequence is performed based on the determination result of the determination means;
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed, the special game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Special game state transition means (big-hit state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting to a state (big-hit state);
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control means ends the change display of each picture sequence within the change display time determined by the change display time determination means, and the determination result of the stop picture determination means at the elapse timing of the change display time In the gaming machine that controls the display of the picture display device so that the stop picture based on the last stop display on the active line,
The pattern display device has a plurality of the effective lines,
The main control means sends a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination means and a stop picture command indicating a stop picture command of each picture sequence determined by the stop picture determination means to the display control means. Command transmission means (external output processing function S501),
The display control means includes
When the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed, the standby design (reach design) constituting the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines. Waiting variation display (reach variation) is performed to terminate the variation display of the other symbol sequences except the one defined symbol sequence (middle symbol sequence Z2), and to end the variation display of the defined symbol sequence after the standby pattern stop display. Standby fluctuation display means (display control processing function S1812) for controlling the display of the picture display device so as to
The combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line (left line L1 or right line L3), and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is finally stopped on the second effective line (right line L3 or left line L1). When a stop picture command indicating display is received, standby picture change means capable of changing the standby picture so that the combination of the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line (normal reach design) Table, stop symbol change processing function S2010),
Identification information display means (display control processing function S1812) for displaying predetermined identification information (notice character, etc.) on the display screen until the pattern of each pattern row is finally stopped and displayed;
Identification information determination means (reach effect determination processing S1904) for determining identification information to be displayed on the display screen based on each command transmitted from the command transmission means;
The identification information determining means receives a determination result command indicating the first result, and a stop pattern command indicating that the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines; and A gaming machine, characterized in that it is determined that specific identification information (such as a premium notice character) is displayed only when a predetermined lottery is won.

  According to the means 11, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the combination of non-specific patterns may be finally stopped and displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to leave room for shifting to a specific gaming state even if a combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game. .

  In addition, when the main control means determines the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern row is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line The display control means is configured to be able to change the standby picture so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. It is possible to avoid harming the harmony. Since the stop pattern of the specified pattern is not changed, the final stop display timing of the specified pattern does not change even if each pattern is variably displayed based on the same regularity as when the specific pattern combination is displayed as the final stop. Because. In this way, by making it possible to change the combination of the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side, for example, the suggestion suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the first result in or after the special gaming state Whether or not to produce an effect can be determined on the display control means side, and the display effects displayed on the display screen can be diversified.

  Furthermore, since the display control means determines the identification information to be displayed on the display screen until the pattern is finally stopped and displayed, diversification of display effects while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main control means. It becomes possible to plan. Furthermore, a determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result, and a stop pattern command indicating that the combination of the specific pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines are received, and The specific identification information is displayed only when a predetermined lottery is won. With this configuration, it is possible to display the specific identification information only with a predetermined probability when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, whereas the determination result of the determination means is the first result. Not only can the player have a sense of superiority, but also the player can have a sense of superiority with respect to the display of the specific identification information, which can greatly improve the interest of the game. . Furthermore, the main control unit transmits a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination unit to the display control unit, and indicates that the combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on one of the active lines. In addition to the reception of the stop picture command, the reception of the determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result is also set as a condition for displaying the specific identification information, for example, the stop picture due to noise or the like. It is possible to prevent the display control means from erroneously grasping the stop pattern of each picture sequence indicated by the command and displaying the specific identification information even though the determination result of the determination means is not the first result. Therefore, although the specific identification information is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the gaming motivation without shifting to the specific gaming state after the special gaming state is ended.

  As a result, in a gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on a command from the main control means, the display control means can be freely controlled while suppressing an increase in processing load on the main control means. By increasing the degree, it becomes possible to suppress monotonization of the game without reducing the player's willingness to play.

  Means 12. In the means 11, the identification information determining means displays the specific identification information when the standby picture changing means changes the standby picture so that the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. A gaming machine characterized by deciding not to do so.

  According to the means 12, when the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, the specific identification information is not displayed even if the determination result of the determination means is the first result. By adopting such a configuration, the specific identification information is displayed only when the player can surely grasp the transition to the specific gaming state after the special gaming state is ended through the final stop display of the specific picture combination. It is possible to prevent the player's superiority from being reduced due to the final stop display of the combination of non-specific patterns despite the fact that the specific identification information is displayed and the player's superiority is enhanced. Is possible.

Means 13. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) that displays the patterns in a variable manner so that a plurality of pattern rows are cyclically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the stop pattern of each pattern row is determined, and if the determination result of the determination means is the first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot), a specific pattern (odd pattern) ) Is the second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific big hit) so that the combination of) is finally stopped and displayed on the preset active lines (effective lines L1 to L5). In this case, stop pattern determining means (a jackpot symbol table, stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.) for determining a stop symbol of each symbol row so that a combination of non-specific symbols (even number symbols) is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line. )When,
Fluctuation display time determining means (variable display time deriving function S812, etc.) for determining a variable display time until the last stop display of each picture sequence is performed based on the determination result of the determination means;
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed, the special game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Special game state transition means (big-hit state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting to a state (big-hit state);
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control means ends the change display of each picture sequence within the change display time determined by the change display time determination means, and the determination result of the stop picture determination means at the elapse timing of the change display time In the gaming machine that controls the display of the picture display device so that the stop picture based on the last stop display on the active line,
Providing effect means (symbol display device 41, annular illumination part 102, etc.) for performing a predetermined effect (reach effect) until the pattern of each pattern row is finally stopped and displayed,
The pattern display device has a plurality of the effective lines,
The main control means sends a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination means and a stop picture command indicating a stop picture command of each picture sequence determined by the stop picture determination means to the display control means. Command transmission means (external output processing function S501),
The display control means includes
When the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed, the standby design (reach design) constituting the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines. Waiting variation display (reach variation) is performed to terminate the variation display of the other symbol sequences except the one defined symbol sequence (middle symbol sequence Z2), and to end the variation display of the defined symbol sequence after the standby pattern stop display. Standby fluctuation display means (display control processing function S1812) for controlling the display of the picture display device so as to
The combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line (left line L1 or right line L3), and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is finally stopped on the second effective line (right line L3 or left line L1). When a stop picture command indicating display is received, standby picture change means capable of changing the standby picture so that the combination of the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line (normal reach design) Table, stop symbol change processing function S2010),
Based on each command transmitted from the command transmission means, it comprises an effect determining means (reach effect determining process S1904) for determining an effect (reach effect) to be performed by the effect means,
The effect determination means receives a determination result command indicating the first result and a stop pattern command indicating that the combination of the specific pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, and A gaming machine, wherein it is determined that specific identification information (such as a premium notice character) is displayed only when a predetermined lottery is won.

  According to the means 13, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the combination of non-specific patterns may be displayed as a final stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to leave room for shifting to a specific gaming state even if a combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game. .

  In addition, when the main control means determines the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern row is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line The display control means is configured to be able to change the standby picture so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. It is possible to avoid harming the harmony. Since the stop pattern of the specified pattern is not changed, the final stop display timing of the specified pattern does not change even if each pattern is variably displayed based on the same regularity as when the specific pattern combination is displayed as the final stop. Because. In this way, by making it possible to change the combination of the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side, for example, the suggestion suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the first result in or after the special gaming state Whether or not to produce an effect can be determined on the display control means side, and the display effects displayed on the display screen can be diversified.

  Furthermore, since the display control means determines an effect to be performed until the picture is finally stopped and displayed, it is possible to diversify the effect while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main control means. Also, a determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result and a stop pattern command indicating that the combination of the specific pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines are received and predetermined The specific performance is performed only when the lottery is won. With this configuration, it is possible to cause a specific effect to be performed only with a predetermined probability when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, and the game with respect to the determination result of the determination means being the first result It is possible not only to give the player a sense of superiority, but also to give the player a sense of superiority with respect to the fact that the specific performance has been performed, and it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the main control unit transmits a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination unit to the display control unit, and indicates that the combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on one of the active lines. In addition to the reception of the stop picture command, the reception of the determination result command indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the first result is also set as a condition for causing the specific effect to be performed. It is possible for the display control means to erroneously grasp the stop pattern of each of the picture sequences indicated by and to prevent the specific effect from being performed even though the determination result of the determination means is not the first result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from diminishing the game motivation without shifting to the specific game state after the special game state is ended despite the specific effect being performed.

  As a result, in a gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on a command from the main control means, the display control means can be freely controlled while suppressing an increase in processing load on the main control means. By increasing the degree, it becomes possible to suppress monotonization of the game without reducing the player's willingness to play.

  Note that “determination of production” here refers to, in addition to determining identification information other than a stop pattern such as a character displayed on the display screen until the final stop display of the pattern of each pattern row, for example, each pattern This includes determination of musical sound to be output before the last stop display of the picture in the row, and determination of whether or not the movable accessory is movable in the configuration including the movable accessory.

  Means 14. In the means 13, the effect determining means does not perform the specific effect when the standby picture changing means changes the standby picture so that the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. A game machine that is characterized by being determined.

  According to the means 14, when the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, the specific effect is not performed even if the determination result of the determination means is the first result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to cause a specific effect to be performed only when the player can surely grasp the transition to the specific game state after the special game state is ended through the final stop display of the combination of specific pictures. It is possible to prevent the player's sense of superiority from diminishing due to the final stop display of a combination of non-specific pictures despite the fact that the player's sense of superiority has increased as a result of the specific performance. It becomes.

  Means 15. In any one of the above means 11 to 14, the display control means stores a plurality of display modes (first to third display modes) having different probabilities that the standby picture changing means changes the standby picture. Mode storage means (program ROM 522), display mode setting means (display mode change processing function) for setting one of the display modes, and a probability corresponding to the display mode set by the display mode setting means And a change determining means (promotion effect lottery functions S2003 and S2004) for determining whether or not to change the standby picture by the standby picture changing means.

  According to the means 15, the display control means stores a plurality of display modes having different probabilities of changing the standby picture, and whether or not to change the standby picture depends on the probability according to the set display mode. The display control means determines. By adopting such a configuration, the display control means can independently change the frequency of changing the standby picture, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed without increasing the processing load of the main control means. It becomes.

  Means 16. In the means 15, an operating means (selection switch 108) operable from outside the gaming machine is provided, the operating means is electrically connected to the display control means and electrically disconnected from the main control means, A gaming machine, wherein the display mode setting means is configured to set any of the display modes based on an operation of the operating means.

  According to the means 16, operation means operable from the outside of the gaming machine is provided, and any one of the display modes is set based on the operation of the operation means. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow a player who plays a game, a manager of a game hall where a gaming machine is installed, and the like to select a display mode, and to suppress monotonization of the game. Further, by electrically connecting the operation means to the display control means and electrically disconnecting from the main control means, the display control means can independently manage the display mode, and the main control means It becomes possible to suppress monotonization of the game suitably without increasing the processing load. Furthermore, by making the operating means electrically disconnected from the main control means, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from outside the gaming machine to the main control means.

  Means 17. In any one of the above-described means 11 to 16, the standby fluctuation display means is configured to display the pattern of the prescribed picture sequence to be displayed on the display screen when the standby picture is stopped and to display the standby picture after the standby display of the standby picture. Predetermined standby fluctuation that controls the display of the picture display device so that the circulation speed for cyclically displaying the specified pattern is the same predetermined standby fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation) regardless of the stop picture of each picture string that is finally stopped and displayed. Display means (normal reach fluctuation display function of display control processing S1812), and the standby picture change means performs the display control of the picture display device so that the predetermined standby fluctuation display means performs the predetermined standby fluctuation. A gaming machine characterized by being able to change a standby picture.

  According to the means 17, when the standby picture is stopped and displayed, the picture of the prescribed picture string to be displayed on the display screen and the circulation speed at which the prescribed picture string is cyclically displayed after the standby picture is stopped and displayed are finally stopped and displayed. The same predetermined standby variation may be performed regardless of the stop pattern of each pattern row. In such a predetermined standby variation, the variation display time varies depending on the stop pattern of the specified pattern sequence to be finally stopped. Therefore, in a situation where predetermined standby fluctuation is performed, for example, the main control unit determines the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, but the display control unit If the stop pattern of each pattern row is changed so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the first active line, the harmony between the elapsed timing of the variable display time and the timing of the last stop display of each pattern row is lost. Will be. Therefore, when the main control means decides that the combination of the specific pattern is displayed on the first effective line as a final stop display and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is displayed on the second effective line as a final stop display in a situation where a predetermined standby variation is performed. By changing the standby picture to a changeable pattern, the display of the fluctuation of each picture string can be displayed while avoiding the loss of harmony between the timing of the fluctuation display time and the timing of the final stop display of each picture string. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control means.

  Means 18. In any one of the above means 11 to means 17, the picture display device includes a first picture row (upper figure row Z1) in which the specific design and the non-specific design are cyclically displayed in a predetermined order, and the first design A gaming machine, characterized in that a second design row (the lower design row Z3) in which the specific design and the non-specific design are cyclically displayed in a reverse order to the sequence is displayed on the display screen.

  According to the means 18, the design display device includes the first design sequence in which the specific design and the non-specific design are cyclically displayed in a predetermined order, and the specific design and the non-specific design in the reverse order of the first design sequence. A second pattern row that is displayed in a circulating manner is displayed. With such a configuration, the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on one of the active lines, and the combination of the non-specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the other active line, causing a problem such as confusion for the player. This can be avoided.

  Means 19. In any one of the above means 11 to 18, the picture display device is configured to stop and display the non-specific picture on the second effective line when the specific picture is stopped and displayed on the first effective line. A gaming machine, wherein the prescribed picture sequence is displayed on the display screen.

  According to the means 19, when the main control means determines the stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of the specific picture is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, the non-specific picture of the specified picture row is displayed on the second effective line. The final stop will always be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the standby picture can be changed, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control means regarding the variable display of each picture row.

  Means 20. In the above means 19, the picture display device displays the prescribed picture string on the display screen as if the specific picture and the non-specific picture are alternately arranged at equal intervals. .

  According to the means 20, the specified pattern sequence is displayed on the display screen as if the specific pattern and the non-specific pattern are alternately arranged at equal intervals. With this configuration, when the specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the first effective line, the non-specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the second effective line, and when the specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the second effective line, A non-specific picture is stopped and displayed on one effective line. Therefore, the display control means can change the standby picture even when the main control means determines the stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of the specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. It becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control means relating to the variable display of the columns.

  Means 21. In the means 19, the picture display device displays the prescribed picture string so that the non-specific picture is stopped and displayed on the first effective line when the specific picture is stopped and displayed on the second effective line. A gaming machine characterized by being displayed on a display screen.

  According to the means 21, in the prescribed pattern sequence, when the specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the first effective line, the non-specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the second effective line, and the specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the second effective line. In this case, the non-specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the first effective line. Therefore, the display control means can change the standby picture even when the main control means determines the stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of the specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. It becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control means relating to the variable display of the columns.

  Means 22. In any one of the above-described means 11 to 21, the display control means causes the first effective line to finally stop and display a specific standby pattern (odd reach pattern) constituting the combination of the specific pattern on the first effective line. When a stop symbol command (stop symbol command indicating a combination of outreach symbols) indicating that the combination of the specific symbols is not finally stopped and displayed is received, the non-specific symbol combination is configured on the second effective line. A second standby pattern changing means (normal reach symbol table, stop symbol change processing function S2010) capable of changing the standby symbol so that the non-specific standby symbol (even reach symbol) is finally stopped and displayed is provided. To play.

  According to the means 22, when the main control means decides that the specific standby picture constituting the combination of the specific picture is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, although the combination of the specific picture is not finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line. The display control means may change the standby picture so that the non-specific standby picture constituting the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. When the main control means determines that the combination of specific patterns is to be finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, the display control means may change the standby pattern so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. In the case of a possible configuration, the opportunity for the final stop display of the combination of specific patterns on the first effective line is reduced. This may lead to a reduction in the expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on the first active line. Therefore, even if the main control means determines that the specific standby pattern constituting the combination of the specific design is to be finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, although the combination of the specific design is not finally displayed on the first effective line, the display is also displayed. By adopting a configuration in which the control means can change the standby picture, the expectation that the combination of the specific pictures will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby picture is stopped and displayed on the first active line is reduced. It is possible to suppress this. Similarly, it is possible to suppress an increase in the expectation that a combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the non-specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on the second effective line.

  Means 23. In the means 22, the picture display device displays a plurality of types of the specific picture and the non-specific picture, and the display control means finally displays the specific standby picture on the first effective line. Change information that associates a reception result when a stop pattern command indicating that the non-specific standby pattern is to be displayed with final stop display on the second effective line is associated with a change result A gaming machine comprising a change information group storage means (program ROM 522) for storing a group (normal reach design table), wherein each of the standby picture change means changes the standby picture based on the change information group.

  According to the means 23, the display control means displays the reception result when the stop picture command indicating that the specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line and the non-specific standby picture on the second effective line. The change information group in which the change result when changing the standby picture to change the standby picture to be displayed in advance is stored in advance, and the display control means finally displays the combination of the specific picture on the first effective line. Regardless of whether or not, the standby picture is changed based on the change information group. By adopting such a configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of specific designs and non-specific designs are variably displayed, when a non-specific standby design that constitutes a combination of any of the non-specific designs is stopped and displayed on the second effective line It is possible to suppress a sense of expectation that the combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed, or an excessive increase.

  Means 24. In the means 22 or 23, the standby picture changing means changes the standby picture with a predetermined probability, and the second standby picture changing means has the same probability as the standby picture changing means. A gaming machine characterized by changing a picture.

  According to the means 24, when the main control means decides to finally stop and display the combination of the specific patterns on the first effective line, the main control means does not finally display the combination of the specific patterns on the first effective line. When it is determined that the specific standby picture is to be finally stopped and displayed on the first active line, the display control means changes the standby picture with the same probability. By adopting such a configuration, when the main control means decides to finally stop and display the combination of specific pictures on the first effective line, the display control means finally stops and displays the combination of non-specific pictures on the second effective line. In the configuration in which the standby pattern is changed, it is possible to avoid a change in the expectation in each situation as a result of changing the standby pattern.

  Means 25. In any one of the means 22 to 24, the second standby picture changing means changes the standby picture to the second effective line when the standby picture is changed so that the non-specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. A gaming machine characterized by not changing the standby pattern when a combination of non-specific patterns is finally displayed.

  According to the means 25, when the standby pattern is changed so that the non-specific standby pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line, and the combination of the non-specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line, the standby pattern is changed. Absent. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a contradiction in which the combination of the non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device even though the determination result of the determination unit is neither the first result nor the second result. can do.

  Means 26. In any one of the means 11 to 25, the main control means finally displays the combination of the non-specific pictures on any of the effective lines when the determination result of the determination means is the first result. In this way, the second stop pattern determining means (elevated symbol table, stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.) for determining the stop pattern of each pattern row, and any stop pattern when the determination result of the determination means is the first result A gaming machine comprising: selection means (promotional lottery processing function S901) for selecting whether to determine a stop picture of each picture row.

  According to the means 26, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the main control means may determine to finally stop and display the combination of non-specific patterns on any of the effective lines. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to expect a transition to the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends even if a combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any active line. Can be suitably suppressed. In other words, in the display control means, when the main control means determines that the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line, Can be changed. On the other hand, for example, when the main control unit determines that the combination of the specific pattern is displayed on the effective lines other than the first effective line as a final stop and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is not displayed on the other effective lines as the final stop, The standby picture cannot be changed so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side. Under such circumstances, it is necessary to change not only the standby pattern but also the stop pattern of the specified pattern sequence, the end timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means, and the display control means end the cyclic display of the specified pattern sequence. This is because it may be difficult to achieve harmony with the end timing. Therefore, the main control means is configured to be able to determine the stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on any effective line when the judgment result of the judgment means is the first result. This makes it possible to leave room for transition to the specific game state after the special game state ends even if a combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any active line. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Means 27. In the means 26, the second stop picture determining means is configured such that the non-specific picture of the specified picture sequence is not finally stopped and displayed on any effective line when the specific picture of the specified picture series is finally stopped and displayed. It is possible to determine a stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle line L2, right-down line L4, right-up line L5). To play.

  According to the means 27, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the main control means may determine that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line. If the main control means decides that the combination of specific patterns is to be finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, the non-specific pattern in the specified pattern row is not finally stopped and displayed on the other effective lines. The standby pattern cannot be changed so that the combination of the patterns is finally stopped and displayed. Under such circumstances, it is necessary to change not only the standby pattern but also the stop pattern of the specified pattern sequence, and the end timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means and the display control means end the cyclic display of the specified pattern sequence. This is because it may be difficult to achieve harmony with the end timing. Therefore, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the main control unit can determine the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of the non-specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the third active line, Even if a combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, it is possible to leave room for transition to the specific game state after the special game state ends, and suitably suppress monotonization of the game It becomes possible.

  Means 28. In the means 26 or 27, the main control means finally stops the specific standby pattern (odd reach pattern) that constitutes the combination of the specific pattern in any of the effective lines, as a result of the determination by the stop pattern determination unit. When the determination result is that the combination of the specific design is not displayed on the active line and the final stop is displayed, the non-specific standby design (even reach design) constituting the non-specific design combination is finally displayed on any of the active lines. A gaming machine comprising a stand-by pattern changing means (reach symbol table, release reach symbol changing processing function S1008) capable of changing a stand-by pattern so as to stop display.

  According to the means 28, when it is determined that the specific standby pattern constituting the combination of the specific design is not finally stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, but the combination of the non-specific design is not displayed. The main control means may change the standby picture so that the non-specific standby picture to be configured is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines. In the configuration in which the stop pattern of each pattern row can be determined so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped when the determination result of the determination means is the first result on the main control side, the combination of specific patterns is The opportunity for the final stop display on any of the active lines will be reduced. This may lead to a decrease in the expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on any active line. Therefore, when it is determined that the specific standby picture constituting the specific picture combination is to be finally stopped and displayed on one of the active lines, although the specific picture combination is not finally stopped and displayed, the main control means changes the standby picture. It is possible to suppress a decrease in a sense of expectation that a combination of specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines. It becomes possible. Similarly, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the expectation that the combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the non-specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines.

  Means 29. In the above means 28, the picture display device displays a plurality of types of the specific picture and the non-specific picture in a variable manner, and the main control means has the stop picture determining means in any one of the effective lines. A main result that associates the determination result when it is determined that the specific standby pattern is to be displayed with final stop and the change result when the standby pattern is changed so that the non-specific standby pattern is displayed with final stop displayed on any of the effective lines. A main control change information group storage unit (ROM 502) for storing a control change information group (reach symbol table) is provided, and the removal standby picture change unit changes the standby picture based on the main control change information group. A gaming machine.

  According to the means 29, the main control means has the determination result when the stop picture determining means decides that the specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, and the non-specific standby picture is displayed on any of the active lines. The main control change information group in which the change result in the case of changing the standby picture to be displayed in the final stop is stored in advance, and the main control means changes the standby picture based on the main control change information group. I do. By adopting such a configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of specific designs and non-specific designs are variably displayed, when any of the non-specific standby designs constituting the combination of non-specific designs is stopped and displayed on the second effective line. It is possible to suppress a sense of expectation that the combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed, or an excessive increase.

  Means 30. In the means 28 or 29, the selecting means selects the second stop picture determining means with a predetermined probability, and the off-standby picture changing means is characterized in that the selecting means determines the second stop picture determining means. A game machine characterized in that the standby picture is changed with the same probability as that of selecting means.

  According to the means 30, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the probability that the main control means determines the stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, The main control means causes the non-specific standby pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on one of the active lines when it is determined that the specific standby pattern is to be finally stopped and displayed on one of the active lines, although the combination of specific patterns is not displayed. The probability of changing the standby pattern is the same. With this configuration, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the main control means determines the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines. In a configuration in which the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed, the expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be displayed in the final stoppage is reduced, or the non-specific pattern is displayed when the non-specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the expectation that the combination of the two will be displayed as a final stop.

  Means 31. In any one of the means 28 to 30, when the stand-by standby picture changing means changes the standby picture so that the non-specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines, the combination of the non-specific pictures is changed. The gaming machine, wherein when the final stop is displayed on any of the active lines, the standby picture is not changed.

  According to the means 31, when the standby picture is changed so that the non-specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines. Do not do. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a contradiction in which the combination of the non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device even though the determination result of the determination unit is neither the first result nor the second result. can do.

  Means 32. In any one of the above means 11 to 25, the main control means determines that the result of determination by the stop picture determining means is that the specific picture is on the third effective line (middle line L2, right falling line L4, right rising line L5). The combination of the non-specific pattern is finally stopped on the third effective line in the case where the result is the final stop display and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is not finally stopped and displayed on any of the other effective lines. A gaming machine comprising stop picture changing means capable of changing a stop picture of each picture row so as to be displayed.

  According to the means 32, the determination result of the stop picture determining means is the final stop display of the combination of the first specific picture on the third effective line and the final stop of the non-specific picture of the specified picture sequence on any of the other active lines. If the determination result is not displayed, the main control means may change the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line. When the main control means determines that the combination of specific patterns is to be finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is not finally stopped and displayed on any of the other effective lines. The standby pattern cannot be changed so that the combination of non-specific patterns is displayed in the final stop state. Under such circumstances, it is necessary to change not only the standby pattern but also the stop pattern of the specified pattern sequence, and the end timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means and the display control means end the cyclic display of the specified pattern sequence. This is because it may be difficult to achieve harmony with the end timing. Therefore, by configuring the main control means so that the stop pattern of each pattern row can be changed so that the combination of the non-specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, the combination of the non-specific pattern is included in any of the effective lines. Even when the final stop is displayed, it is possible to leave a room for shifting to the specific game state, and it is possible to suitably suppress monotonization of the game.

  Means 33. In the means 32, the main control means causes the result of determination by the stop pattern determining means to finally stop and display a specific standby pattern (odd reach pattern) constituting the combination of the specific pattern on the third effective line. When the determination result indicates that the combination of the specific pattern is not finally stopped and displayed on the active line, the non-specific standby pattern (even reach pattern) constituting the combination of the non-specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line. A gaming machine comprising: a stand-by pattern changing means (reach symbol table, release reach symbol changing processing function S1008) capable of changing a stand-by pattern.

  According to the means 33, the combination of non-specific patterns is configured when it is determined that the specific standby pattern constituting the combination of the specific pattern is not finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line. The main control means may change the standby picture so that the non-specific standby picture to be displayed is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line. The main control means itself changes the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the non-specific pattern combination is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line when it is determined that the specific pattern combination is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line. In the configuration in which the combination is possible, the chance that the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line is reduced. This may lead to a reduction in the expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on the third active line. Therefore, when it is determined that the specific standby picture constituting the combination of the specific picture is not finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line but is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, the standby control pattern is changed on the main control means side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in a sense of expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on the third effective line. Become. Similarly, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the expectation that the combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the non-specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on the third effective line.

  Means 34. In the means 33, the picture display device displays a plurality of types of the specific picture and the non-specific picture, and the main control means is configured such that the stop picture determining means is located on the third effective line. Main control change that associates a determination result when it is determined that the standby pattern is to be displayed with final stop display and a change result when the standby pattern is changed so that the non-specific standby pattern is displayed with final stop display on the third active line Main control change information group storage means (ROM 502) for storing an information group (reach symbol table) is provided, and the off-standby pattern change means changes the standby pattern based on the main control change information group. Gaming machine.

  According to the means 34, the main control means has the determination result when the stop picture determining means determines that the specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, and the non-specific standby picture is finally displayed on the third effective line. A main control change information group that associates a change result when changing the standby picture so as to stop display is stored in advance, and the main control unit changes the standby picture based on the main control change information group. . By adopting such a configuration, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of specific designs and non-specific designs are variably displayed, when any of the non-specific standby designs constituting the combination of non-specific designs is stopped and displayed on the third effective line. It is possible to suppress a sense of expectation that the combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed, or an excessive increase.

  Means 35. In the means 33 or 34, the stop picture changing means changes the stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line with a predetermined probability. The off-standby picture changing means changes the standby picture with the same probability as the probability that the stop picture changing means changes the stop picture of each picture row.

  According to the means 35, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the probability of changing the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, and the combination of the specific patterns Is the same as the probability of changing the standby picture so that the non-specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on the third active line when it is determined that the specific standby picture is to be finally stopped and displayed on the third active line. Has been. With this configuration, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the main control means itself changes the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line. In a configuration in which the specific standby picture is stopped and displayed on the third active line, the expectation that the combination of the specific pictures will be finally stopped and displayed is reduced, and the non-specific standby picture is displayed on the third active line. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in a sense of expectation that a combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed at the stage where is stopped and displayed.

  Means 36. In any one of the above means 33 to 35, the off-standby picture changing means changes the standby picture so that the non-specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, whereby the combination of the non-specific pictures is The gaming machine, wherein when the final stop is displayed on the third active line, the standby pattern is not changed.

  According to the means 36, when the standby picture is changed so that the non-specific standby picture is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, and the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the third effective line, the standby picture is changed. Absent. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a contradiction in which the combination of the non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device even though the determination result of the determination unit is neither the first result nor the second result. can do.

  Means 37. In any one of the means 11 to 36, the display control means receives a determination result command indicating the first result, and finally displays the combination of the non-specific picture on any of the effective lines. In the case where it is made, suggestion effect means (promotion notification processing function S2209) for performing an suggestion effect (promotion effect) that suggests that the game state shifts to the specific game state under the special game state or after the special game state ends. A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the means 37, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result and the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, the special game state is entered after the special game state is ended. Is suggested under special gaming conditions or after the end. By adopting such a configuration, even if a combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed and a transition is made to a special game state, a game under the special game state is performed while expecting a suggestion effect to be performed. It becomes possible to suppress not only the game under the normal game state but also the monotonization of the game under the special game state.

  Means 38. In any one of the means 11 to 37, the main control means includes a change display pattern determination means (a change pattern determination function S811, S1010, etc.) for determining a change display pattern of each picture sequence, and the display control means. Is a game machine that controls display of the pattern display device so as to display each pattern row in a variable manner according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means.

  According to the means 38, the main control means determines the variable display pattern of each picture sequence. In such a configuration, when the display control means changes the stop pattern of the prescribed pattern sequence determined by the main control means, the variable display time changes, and the elapsed timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means and each pattern sequence are changed. The harmony with the timing of the final stop display is impaired. Therefore, by changing the standby pattern without changing the stop pattern of the specified pattern sequence and allowing the combination of non-specific patterns to be finally stopped and displayed, freedom of display control means can be achieved while eliminating the above concerns. It becomes possible to increase the degree.

  Means 39. In any one of the means 11 to 38, the main control means obtains information (values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc.) when the operation condition is satisfied (start winning process S104). And the determination means uses the information acquired by the acquisition means to determine whether or not to win (big hit random number counter C1) or specific non-specific (big hit type counters C2, C2a) , The jackpot symbol counter C2b) is determined, the command transmission means as the determination result command indicating that it is the first result, a hit command (jackpot variation pattern command) indicating that the winning, and the specified A specific command (specific command) indicating that the display control means is separately transmitted to the display control means Game machine and wherein the door.

  According to the means 39, information is acquired when the operating condition is satisfied, and using this acquired information, a determination of a hit or a specific non-specific determination is performed when starting the variable display of the pattern. Then, as the determination result command indicating the first result, a winning command indicating winning and a specific command indicating specific are separately transmitted to the display control means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably avoid the specific effect being performed even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result. This is because, for example, when the display control means erroneously grasps any one of the stop picture command, the winning command, and the specific command due to noise or the like, the determination for performing the specific identification information or the specific effect is not performed.

  Means 40. In any one of the above means 11 to 38, the main control means obtains information (value of the big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, etc.) when the operation condition is satisfied (start winning process S104). And the determination means uses the information acquired by the acquisition means to determine whether or not to win (big hit random number counter C1) or specific non-specific (big hit type counters C2, C2a) , The jackpot symbol counter C2b) is determined, and the command transmission means indicates a specific hit command (indicating that it is a win and indicating the specific as a determination result command indicating the first result) A specific command) is transmitted to the display control means.

  According to the means 40, information is acquired when the operation condition is established, and using this acquired information, a determination of a hit or a specific non-specific determination is performed when starting the variable display of the pattern. Then, as the determination result command indicating the first result, a specific hit command indicating that it is a win and specific is transmitted to the display control means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid performing a specific effect even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result.

  Means 41. In any one of the above means 11 to 38, the main control means obtains information (value of the big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, etc.) when the operation condition is satisfied (start winning process S104). The determination means uses the information acquired by the acquisition means when starting the variation display of the pattern to determine whether it is a specific hit or non-specific hit (big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, C2a , Jackpot symbol counter C2b), the command transmission means, as a determination result command indicating the first result, a plurality of determination result commands (jackpot variation pattern command, A specific command) is transmitted to the display control means.

  According to the means 41, information is acquired when the operation condition is established, and using this acquired information, it is determined whether the specific hit or the non-specific hit is off when starting the variable display of the pattern. Then, a plurality of determination result commands indicating specific hits are transmitted to the display control means as determination result commands indicating the first result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably avoid the specific effect being performed even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result. For example, when the display control means erroneously grasps either the stop picture command or each determination result command due to noise or the like, the decision to perform specific identification information or specific effect is not performed.

  Means 42. In any one of the means 11 to 38, the main control means obtains information (values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc.) when the operation condition is satisfied (start winning process S104). The determination means uses the information acquired by the acquisition means when starting the variation display of the pattern to determine whether it is a specific hit or non-specific hit (big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, C2a , The jackpot symbol counter C2b) is determined, and the command transmission means displays the specific hit command (specific command) indicating the specific hit as the determination result command indicating the first result. A gaming machine characterized by transmitting to the means.

  According to the means 42, information is acquired when the operating condition is established, and using this acquired information, it is determined whether the specific hit or the non-specific hit is off when starting the variable display of the pattern. And the specific hit command which shows that it is specific win is transmitted with respect to a display control means as a determination result command which shows that it is a 1st result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid performing a specific effect even though the determination result of the determination unit is not the first result.

  Means 43. In any one of the above-described means 39 to 42, the acquisition means wins the type information (value of the jackpot type counter C2a) used when determining the specific non-specific type and at least the determination result of the determination unit. A game machine characterized by separately acquiring the pattern information (value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b) used when determining the stop symbol in the case.

  According to the means 43, when the operating condition is satisfied, the type information used when determining the specific non-specific type and the pattern information used when determining the stop pattern when the determination result of the determination means is correct And are acquired separately. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in advance as compared with the configuration in which the type determination and the stop picture determination are performed based on one information, and the storage capacity of the main control unit Can be prevented from increasing.

  Means 44. In the means 43, the picture display device displays a plurality of types of the specific picture and the non-specific picture in a variable manner, and the main control means displays the acquisition result of the picture information and a stop picture for final stop display. And a stop pattern information group storage unit (program ROM 522) for storing a stop pattern information group (specific symbol table, non-specific symbol table) for each type. When the determination result is a win, the gaming machine is characterized in that a stop picture to be finally stopped and displayed is determined based on the type information, the picture information, and the content stored in the stop picture information group storage means.

  According to the means 44, when the stop pattern information group in which the acquisition result of the pattern information is associated with the stop pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is stored for each hit type, and the determination result of the determination means is a win, A stop pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is determined based on the type information, the pattern information, and the contents stored in the stop pattern information group storage means. When a plurality of types of specific designs and non-specific designs are variably displayed, if the configuration is such that the type is determined and the stop design is determined based on the information of 1, the ratio of the final stop display for each specific design is There is a possibility that the ratio of the final stop display in the case of different or non-specific is different for each non-specific pattern. Therefore, the type information used when determining the type and the pattern information used when determining the stop pattern in the case of winning are separately acquired, and the stop pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is determined based on these information By doing so, it becomes possible to equalize the proportion of each picture that is finally stopped and displayed for each hit type. In addition, in the case of winning, it is possible to relatively easily set the ratio for the specific hit and the ratio for the non-specific hit.

Means 45. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) that displays the patterns in a variable manner so that a plurality of pattern rows are cyclically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the stop pattern of each pattern row is determined, and if the determination result of the determination means is the first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot), a specific pattern (odd pattern) ) Is the second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific big hit) so that the combination of) is finally stopped and displayed on the preset active lines (effective lines L1 to L5). In this case, stop pattern determining means (a jackpot symbol table, stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.) for determining a stop symbol of each symbol row so that a combination of non-specific symbols (even number symbols) is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line. )When,
Fluctuation display time determining means (variable display time deriving function S812, etc.) for determining a variable display time until the last stop display of each picture sequence is performed based on the determination result of the determination means;
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed, the special game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Special game state transition means (big-hit state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting to a state (big-hit state);
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control means ends the change display of each picture sequence within the change display time determined by the change display time determination means, and the determination result of the stop picture determination means at the elapse timing of the change display time In the gaming machine that controls the display of the picture display device so that the stop picture based on the last stop display on the active line,
The pattern display device has a plurality of the effective lines,
The display control means includes
When the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed, the standby design (reach design) constituting the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines. Waiting variation display (reach variation) is performed to terminate the variation display of the other symbol sequences except the one defined symbol sequence (middle symbol sequence Z2), and to end the variation display of the defined symbol sequence after the standby pattern stop display. Standby fluctuation display means (display control processing function S1812) for controlling the display of the picture display device so as to
The determination result of the stop picture determining means is the final stop display of the combination of the specific pictures on the first effective line (left line L1 or right line L3) and the second effective line (right line L3 or left line L1). Standby picture change means capable of changing the standby picture so that the combination of the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line when the determination result is that the non-specific picture of the specified picture sequence is finally stopped and displayed. A gaming machine comprising: a normal reach symbol table and a stop symbol change processing function S2010.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the combination of the specific design is finally stopped and when the determination result of the determination unit is the second result, the combination of the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed. There is one in which a determination result is uniquely associated with a combination of patterns to be displayed in a final stop state. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is possible to play a game while expecting that a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonous gaming under a normal gaming state. However, in such a configuration, when a combination of non-specific pictures is displayed as a final stop, there is no room for transition to a specific game state after the end of the special game state. There is concern that the player's willingness to play may be reduced. Therefore, the present inventors can play a game without reducing the player's willingness to play the game by making it possible to stop and display a combination of non-specific pictures even when the determination result of the determination means is the first result. It has been assumed that it is possible to suppress the monotonization of.

  In addition, if the main control means determines that the combination of specific patterns is to be finally stopped and displayed, the display control means can change the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed. We thought it desirable from the viewpoint of diversifying display effects. However, for example, in a gaming machine in which the picture of the specified picture sequence displayed after the standby picture stop display is the same regardless of the standby picture, and the fluctuation speed of the specified picture series does not change after the standby picture stop display, this regulation The variable display time changes depending on the stop pattern of the pattern sequence. For this reason, when the main control means has decided to display the combination of specific patterns as a final stop display, the display control means has changed the stop pattern of each pattern row so as to display the combination of non-specific patterns as a final stop, It is impossible to achieve harmony between the elapse timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means and the timing at which the display control means finally displays the combination of non-specific patterns. Therefore, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the stop pattern of each pattern row is changed so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display control unit side. A new problem has arisen that is difficult.

  According to this point means 45, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the combination of non-specific patterns may be finally stopped and displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to leave room for shifting to a specific gaming state even if a combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game. .

  In addition, when the main control means determines the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern row is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line The display control means is configured to be able to change the standby picture so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. It is possible to avoid harming the harmony. Since the stop pattern of the specified pattern is not changed, the final stop display timing of the specified pattern does not change even if each pattern is variably displayed based on the same regularity as when the specific pattern combination is displayed as the final stop. Because. In this way, by making it possible to change the combination of the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side, for example, the suggestion suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the first result in or after the special gaming state Whether or not to produce an effect can be determined on the display control means side, and the display effects displayed on the display screen can be diversified.

  As a result, in the gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on the command from the main control means, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game by increasing the degree of freedom of the display control means. Become.

Means 46. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) that displays the patterns in a variable manner so that a plurality of pattern rows are cyclically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Fluctuation display time determination means (variation display time derivation function S812, etc.) for determining a variation display time until each picture string is displayed in a final stop state;
The determination result of the determination means is a first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot) or a second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific jackpot), and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means When the time elapses, special gaming state transition means (jackpot state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (bonus state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control means ends the variable display of each picture sequence within the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means, and the determination result of the determination means is the first result. A game machine that controls the display of the picture display device so that the combination of specific pictures is finally stopped and the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped when the determination result of the determination means is the second result. In
The display control means includes
If the determination result of the determination means is the first result, whether or not the combination of the non-specific patterns can be displayed in a final stop state is based on at least the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means. Determining means (promotion effect processing function S1903),
When it is determined that the determination means is possible, final stop display pattern determination means (normal reach pattern table, stop pattern change) that determines stop patterns of each pattern row so that the combination of the non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed. And a processing function S2010).

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the combination of the specific design is finally stopped and when the determination result of the determination unit is the second result, the combination of the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed. There is one in which a determination result is uniquely associated with a combination of patterns to be displayed in a final stop state. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is possible to play a game while expecting that a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonous gaming under a normal gaming state. However, in such a configuration, when a combination of non-specific pictures is displayed as a final stop, there is no room for transition to a specific game state after the end of the special game state. There is concern that the player's willingness to play may be reduced. Therefore, the present inventors can play a game without reducing the player's willingness to play the game by making it possible to stop and display a combination of non-specific pictures even when the determination result of the determination means is the first result. It has been assumed that it is possible to suppress the monotonization of.

  In addition, if the main control means determines that the combination of specific patterns is to be finally stopped and displayed, the display control means can change the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed. We thought it desirable from the viewpoint of diversifying display effects. However, for example, in a gaming machine in which the picture of the specified picture sequence displayed after the standby picture stop display is the same regardless of the standby picture, and the fluctuation speed of the specified picture series does not change after the standby picture stop display, this regulation The variable display time changes depending on the stop pattern of the pattern sequence. For this reason, when the main control means has decided to display the combination of specific patterns as a final stop display, the display control means has changed the stop pattern of each pattern row so as to display the combination of non-specific patterns as a final stop, It is impossible to achieve harmony between the elapse timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means and the timing at which the display control means finally displays the combination of non-specific patterns. Therefore, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the stop pattern of each pattern row is changed so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display control unit side. A new problem has arisen that is difficult.

  According to this point means 46, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the combination of non-specific patterns may be displayed as a final stop. By adopting such a configuration, even if a combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed, it is possible to leave room for transition to a specific game state after the end of the special game state. It becomes possible to suppress.

  Whether or not it is possible to finally stop and display a combination of non-specific patterns on the display control means side based on at least the variable display time determined by the main control means when the determination result of the determination means is the first result. If possible, the display control means determines the stop pattern of each pattern sequence so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed. In this way, by making it possible to determine the combination of the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side, for example, a suggestion effect is suggested that suggests that the determination result is the first result under the special gaming state or after the end thereof. It can be determined on the display control means side or the like, and the display effects displayed on the display screen can be diversified. In addition, since it is configured to determine whether or not it is possible to finally stop and display a combination of non-specific patterns based on at least the variable display time determined by the main control unit, the elapsed timing of the variable display time and each pattern row are finally displayed. It is possible to avoid harming harmony with the timing of stop display.

  As a result, in the gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on the command from the main control means, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game by increasing the degree of freedom of the display control means. Become.

Means 47. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) that displays the patterns in a variable manner so that a plurality of pattern rows are cyclically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Fluctuation display time determination means (variation display time derivation function S812, etc.) for determining a variation display time until each picture string is displayed in a final stop state;
The determination result of the determination means is a first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot) or a second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific jackpot), and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means When the time elapses, special gaming state transition means (jackpot state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (bonus state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control means includes
It is set in advance so that the variation display of each picture sequence is completed within the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means, and the determination result of the determination means is the first result. The combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the effective lines (effective lines L1 to L5), and the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line when the determination result of the determination means is the second result. The display control of the picture display device,
At least in the case where the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result, the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination time, and each picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line In a gaming machine that is associated with a stop picture in a row,
The pattern display device has a plurality of the effective lines,
The display control means includes
Stop pattern grasping means (stop symbol setting process S1808) for grasping a stop pattern of each pattern row to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line;
When the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed, the standby design (reach design) constituting the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines. Waiting variation display (reach variation) is performed to terminate the variation display of the other symbol sequences except the one defined symbol sequence (middle symbol sequence Z2), and to end the variation display of the defined symbol sequence after the standby pattern stop display. Standby fluctuation display means (display control processing function S1812) for controlling the display of the picture display device so as to
As a result of grasping by the stop pattern grasping means, the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line (left line L1 or right line L3) and the second effective line (right line L3 or left line L1) Standby picture change means capable of changing the standby picture so that the combination of the non-specific picture is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line when the non-specific picture of the specified pattern is finally stopped and displayed. A gaming machine comprising: a normal reach symbol table and a stop symbol change processing function S2010.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the combination of the specific design is finally stopped and when the determination result of the determination unit is the second result, the combination of the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed. There is one in which a determination result is uniquely associated with a combination of patterns to be displayed in a final stop state. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is possible to play a game while expecting that a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonous gaming under a normal gaming state. However, in such a configuration, when a combination of non-specific pictures is displayed as a final stop, there is no room for transition to a specific game state after the end of the special game state. There is concern that the player's willingness to play may be reduced. Therefore, the present inventors can play a game without reducing the player's willingness to play the game by making it possible to stop and display a combination of non-specific pictures even when the determination result of the determination means is the first result. It has been assumed that it is possible to suppress the monotonization of.

  In addition, if the main control means determines that the combination of specific patterns is to be finally stopped and displayed, the display control means can change the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed. We thought it desirable from the viewpoint of diversifying display effects. However, for example, in a gaming machine in which the picture of the specified picture sequence displayed after the standby picture stop display is the same regardless of the standby picture, and the fluctuation speed of the specified picture series does not change after the standby picture stop display, this regulation The variable display time changes depending on the stop pattern of the pattern sequence. For this reason, when the main control means has decided to display the combination of specific patterns as a final stop display, the display control means has changed the stop pattern of each pattern row so as to display the combination of non-specific patterns as a final stop, It is impossible to achieve harmony between the elapse timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means and the timing at which the display control means finally displays the combination of non-specific patterns. Therefore, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the stop pattern of each pattern row is changed so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display control unit side. A new problem has arisen that is difficult.

  According to this point means 47, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the combination of non-specific patterns may be displayed as a final stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to leave room for shifting to a specific gaming state even if a combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game. .

  Further, when the main control means determines the variable display time so that the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line, the display control is performed. By making the standby picture changeable so that the means finally displays the combination of non-specific pictures on the second effective line, the harmony between the elapsed timing of the variable display time and the timing of the last stop display of each picture string is achieved. It is possible to avoid damage. Since the stop pattern of the specified pattern is not changed, the final stop display timing of the specified pattern does not change even if each pattern is variably displayed based on the same regularity as when the specific pattern combination is displayed as the final stop. Because. In this way, by making it possible to change the combination of the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side, for example, the suggestion suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the first result in or after the special gaming state Whether or not to produce an effect can be determined on the display control means side, and the display effects displayed on the display screen can be diversified.

  As a result, in the gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on the command from the main control means, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game by increasing the degree of freedom of the display control means. Become.

Means 48. A pattern display device (symbol display device 41) that displays the patterns in a variable manner so that a plurality of pattern rows are cyclically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen;
Main control means (main control device 271) for overall management of games;
Display control means (display control device 214) for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Determination means for performing a predetermined determination (such as jackpot determination function S801, jackpot type determination function S802),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the stop pattern of each pattern row is determined, and if the determination result of the determination means is the first result (result indicating that it is a specific jackpot), a specific pattern (odd pattern) ) Is the second result (result indicating that it is a non-specific big hit) so that the combination of) is finally stopped and displayed on the preset active lines (effective lines L1 to L5). In this case, stop pattern determining means (a jackpot symbol table, stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.) for determining a stop symbol of each symbol row so that a combination of non-specific symbols (even number symbols) is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line. )When,
Fluctuation display time determining means (variable display time deriving function S812, etc.) for determining a variable display time until the last stop display of each picture sequence is performed based on the determination result of the determination means;
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed, the special game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Special game state transition means (big-hit state processing S1101 to S1109) for shifting to a state (big-hit state);
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, a specific gaming state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result after the end of the special gaming state. Specific game state transition means (state transition processing S1110 to S1112)
The display control means ends the change display of each picture sequence within the change display time determined by the change display time determination means, and the determination result of the stop picture determination means at the elapse timing of the change display time In the gaming machine that controls the display of the picture display device so that the stop picture based on the last stop display on the active line,
The pattern display device has a plurality of the effective lines,
The display control means includes
Other pattern rows except for one specified pattern row (middle symbol row Z2) so that the standby pattern (reach symbol) constituting the combination of the specific design or the non-specific design is stopped on any of the effective lines The display of the prescribed pattern sequence to be displayed on the display screen when the standby display of the standby pattern is stopped, and the circulation speed to circulate and display the prescribed pattern sequence after the standby display of the standby pattern is stopped. , Predetermined standby fluctuation display means (normal reach fluctuation display function of display control processing S1812) for controlling the display of the picture display device so that the same predetermined standby fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation) is performed regardless of the determination result of the stop picture determining means; ,
The determination result of the stop picture determining means is the final stop display of the combination of the specific pictures on the first effective line (left line L1 or right line L3) and the second effective line (right line L3 or left line L1). In the determination result for the final stop display of the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence, when the display display control is performed so that the predetermined standby variation display means performs the predetermined standby variation, the second effective line Standby pattern changing means (normal reach symbol table, stop symbol changing processing function S2010) capable of changing the standby symbol so that a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed;
As a result of determination by the stop pattern determining means, a specific standby pattern (odd reach pattern) constituting the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped on the first effective line, and the combination of the specific pattern is displayed on the first effective line. In the case of a determination result (combination of outlier reach symbols) that is not to be displayed in the final stop, and when the display control of the picture display device is performed so that the predetermined standby fluctuation display means performs the predetermined standby fluctuation, Second standby design change means (normal reach design table, stop design change processing function S2010) capable of changing the standby design so that non-specific standby design (even reach design) constituting the combination of specific designs is finally stopped and displayed. )When,
Display mode storage means (program ROM 522) for storing a plurality of display modes (first to third display modes) with different probabilities that each of the standby picture changing means changes the standby picture;
Display mode setting means (display mode change processing function) for setting any one of the display modes;
Change determining means (promotion effect lottery functions S2003 and S2004) for determining whether or not to change the standby picture by each of the standby picture changing means with a probability corresponding to the display mode set by the display mode setting means. ,
The main control means includes
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, second stop pattern determination means for determining a stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of the non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines. (Elevated symbol table, stop symbol setting processing function S903, etc.)
Selecting means (promotional lottery processing function S901) for selecting which stop picture determining means to determine the stop picture of each picture sequence when the judgment result of the judging means is the first result;
When the determination result of the stop pattern determination means is a determination result that causes the specific standby pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines and that the combination of the specific patterns is not to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line, the non-specific It is characterized by comprising a stand-by pattern changing means (reach symbol table, miss-reach symbol changing process function S1008) capable of changing the stand-by pattern so that the stand-by pattern is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines. To play.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the combination of the specific design is finally stopped and when the determination result of the determination unit is the second result, the combination of the non-specific design is finally stopped and displayed. There is one in which a determination result is uniquely associated with a combination of patterns to be displayed in a final stop state. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is possible to play a game while expecting that a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonous gaming under a normal gaming state. However, in such a configuration, when a combination of non-specific pictures is displayed as a final stop, there is no room for transition to a specific game state after the end of the special game state. There is concern that the player's willingness to play may be reduced. Therefore, the present inventors can play a game without reducing the player's willingness to play the game by making it possible to stop and display a combination of non-specific pictures even when the determination result of the determination means is the first result. It has been assumed that it is possible to suppress the monotonization of.

  In addition, if the main control means determines that the combination of specific patterns is to be finally stopped and displayed, the display control means can change the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed. We thought it desirable from the viewpoint of diversifying display effects. However, for example, in a gaming machine in which the picture of the specified picture sequence displayed after the standby picture stop display is the same regardless of the standby picture, and the fluctuation speed of the specified picture series does not change after the standby picture stop display, this regulation The variable display time changes depending on the stop pattern of the pattern sequence. For this reason, when the main control means has decided to display the combination of specific patterns as a final stop display, the display control means has changed the stop pattern of each pattern row so as to display the combination of non-specific patterns as a final stop, It is impossible to achieve harmony between the elapse timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means and the timing at which the display control means finally displays the combination of non-specific patterns. Therefore, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result, the stop pattern of each pattern row is changed so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display control unit side. A new problem has arisen that is difficult.

  According to this point means 48, when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the combination of non-specific patterns may be displayed as a final stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to leave room for shifting to a specific gaming state even if a combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game. .

  In addition, when the standby pattern is stopped and displayed, the pattern of the specified pattern sequence to be displayed on the display screen, and the circulation speed at which the specified pattern sequence is cyclically displayed after the standby pattern is stopped are displayed. The same predetermined standby variation may be performed regardless of the stop pattern. In such a predetermined standby variation, the variation display time varies depending on the stop pattern of the specified pattern sequence to be finally stopped. Therefore, in a situation where predetermined standby fluctuation is performed, for example, the main control unit determines the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, but the display control unit If the stop pattern of each pattern row is changed so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the first active line, the harmony between the elapsed timing of the variable display time and the timing of the last stop display of each pattern row is lost. Will be. Therefore, when the main control means decides that the combination of the specific pattern is displayed on the first effective line as a final stop display and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern sequence is displayed on the second effective line as a final stop display in a situation where a predetermined standby variation is performed. By changing the standby picture to a changeable pattern, the display of the fluctuation of each picture string can be displayed while avoiding the loss of harmony between the timing of the fluctuation display time and the timing of the final stop display of each picture string. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control means. Since the stop pattern of the specified pattern is not changed, the final stop display timing of the specified pattern does not change even if each pattern is variably displayed based on the same regularity as when the specific pattern combination is displayed as the final stop. Because. In this way, by making it possible to change the combination of the patterns to be finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side, for example, the suggestion suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the first result in or after the special gaming state Whether or not to produce an effect can be determined on the display control means side, and the display effects displayed on the display screen can be diversified.

  In addition, the main control is performed when the specific standby picture constituting the combination of the specific picture is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, although the combination of the specific picture is not finally stopped and displayed on the first active line in a situation where the predetermined standby fluctuation is performed. When the means is determined, the display control means may change the standby picture so that the non-specific standby picture constituting the combination of the non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line. When the main control means decides to finally stop and display the combination of the specific patterns on the first effective line under the situation where the predetermined standby fluctuation is performed, the display control means finally displays and displays the combination of the non-specific patterns on the second effective line. In the case where the standby picture can be changed as described above, the opportunity for the final stop display of the combination of the specific pictures on the first effective line is reduced. This may lead to a reduction in the expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on the first active line. Therefore, when the specific standby picture pattern that constitutes the specific picture combination is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line, although the specific picture combination is not finally stopped and displayed on the first active line under the condition of performing the predetermined standby fluctuation, the main control means. The display control means can change the standby picture even when determined, so that the combination of the specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby picture is stopped and displayed on the first effective line. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation of being. Similarly, it is possible to suppress an increase in the expectation that a combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the non-specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on the second effective line.

  Further, the display control means stores a plurality of display modes with different probabilities of changing the standby picture, and whether or not to change the standby picture is determined with a probability corresponding to the set display mode. Will be determined. By adopting such a configuration, the display control means can independently change the frequency of changing the standby picture, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed without increasing the processing load of the main control means. It becomes.

  As a result, in the gaming machine in which the display control means performs display control of the picture display device based on the command from the main control means, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game by increasing the degree of freedom of the display control means. Become.

  In addition to this, the main control unit may determine to finally stop and display a combination of non-specific pictures on any of the effective lines when the determination result of the determination unit is the first result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to expect a transition to a specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends even if a combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any active line. Can be suitably suppressed. That is, the display control means performs the main control when the combination of the specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the first effective line and the non-specific pattern of the specified pattern is finally stopped and displayed on the second effective line in a situation where predetermined standby fluctuation is performed. When the means is determined, the standby picture can be changed. On the other hand, for example, in a situation where predetermined standby fluctuation is performed, main control is performed unless a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on an effective line other than the first effective line and a non-specific pattern of a specified pattern is not finally displayed on another effective line. If the means is determined, the standby picture cannot be changed so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on the display control means side. Under such circumstances, it is necessary to change not only the standby pattern but also the stop pattern of the specified pattern sequence, the end timing of the variable display time determined by the main control means, and the display control means end the cyclic display of the specified pattern sequence. This is because it becomes difficult to achieve harmony with the end timing. Therefore, the main control means is configured to be able to determine the stop picture of each picture row so that the combination of non-specific pictures is finally stopped and displayed on any effective line when the judgment result of the judgment means is the first result. This makes it possible to leave room for transition to the specific game state after the special game state ends even if a combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any active line. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In addition, when it is determined that the combination of specific patterns is not displayed in the final stop state but the specific standby pattern is finally displayed in one of the active lines, the main control is performed so that the non-specific standby pattern is displayed in the final stop state on any of the active lines. Means may change the standby picture. In the configuration in which the stop pattern of each pattern row can be determined so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped when the determination result of the determination means is the first result on the main control side, the combination of specific patterns is The opportunity for the final stop display on any of the active lines will be reduced. This may lead to a decrease in the expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on any active line. Therefore, when it is determined that the specific standby pattern is not displayed in the final stop state but the specific standby pattern is displayed as a final stop display on one of the active lines, the standby control pattern can be changed on the main control means side. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation that the combination of the specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines. Similarly, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the expectation that the combination of non-specific patterns will be finally stopped and displayed when the non-specific standby pattern is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines.

  Note that any one of the means 1 to 47 may be applied as appropriate to the structure of the means 45 to 48, and a synergistic effect can be expected with such a structure.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an exploded or exploded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view showing a front structure of a main body frame 12 constituting the pachinko machine 10. is there. 2 and 3, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is left blank for convenience.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. The outer frame 11 is attached to a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is in a state in which wooden plate members are combined in a rectangular frame shape as a whole, and is configured by fixing each plate member with a detachable fastening member such as a small screw. Therefore, compared to the conventional structure in which the plate members are assembled using nails and rivets, the components can be easily reused. In the present embodiment, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left and right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). In addition, you may comprise the outer frame 11 with metals, such as a synthetic resin and aluminum.

  A body frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing axis is set to extend vertically to the left as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the main body frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as the axis. Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a game ball launching handle 18 on the right side, the main body frame 12 can be opened and closed around the side opposite to the game ball launching handle 18. It can be said. The main body frame 12 is made of synthetic resin, specifically ABS resin. By using the ABS resin, the main body frame 12 having a relatively low cost and high impact resistance can be obtained. The body frame 12 may be made of a metal such as aluminum. In the present embodiment, the outer frame 11 and the main body frame 12 constitute a gaming machine main body. As an alternative to the outer frame 11, an installation frame may be provided in advance on the game hall side, and the main body frame 12 may be assembled to the installation frame when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In such a configuration, the main body frame 12 constitutes a gaming machine main body.

  A front plate 14 is provided at a lower position on the front side of the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and the width thereof is configured to substantially coincide with the width of the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 includes a base portion 15 having a bulging portion 15a that bulges to the near side in a substantially central portion in the width direction, and a ball tray that is provided inside the bulging portion 15a of the base portion 15 and has a dish shape that is recessed downward. And a back wall panel 17 constituting a wall on the back side of the bottom plate 16. Since the base portion 15 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by a fastening member such as a screw, the base portion 15 constitutes an attachment portion for the main body frame 12. A game ball launching handle 18 is provided on the base portion 15 so as to protrude to the right side of the bulging portion 15a. The back wall panel 17 is provided with a ball discharge port 17 a, and the game balls discharged from the ball discharge port 17 a are stored in the lower plate 16.

  A slide-type ball removal lever 19 is provided on the front side of the bulging portion 15 a of the base portion 15. The ball removal lever 19 may be a push type. When the ball removal lever 19 is operated, a closing plate (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the lower plate 16 moves integrally or via a link to open the ball removal hole, and the stored balls in the lower plate 16 are moved. It is configured to be discharged downward. The ball removal lever 19 is provided with a biasing member such as a coil spring that biases the ball removal lever 19 toward the side where the ball removal hole is closed, and the biasing force of the biasing member when the operation of the ball removal lever 19 is released. Thus, the closing plate returns to the open position of the ball hole. A speaker cover portion 17b in which a large number of small holes are gathered is formed at a position different from the ball outlet 17a of the back wall panel 17, and the output sound of the speaker 20 installed behind the panel 17 is the speaker cover. It is emitted forward through the part 17b.

  The base part 15 is provided with an ashtray 21 on the left side of the bulging part 15a. The ashtray 21 is attached so as to be able to be reversed to the lower side on the front side so as to easily remove the butts and the like accumulated in the inside, and faces the base portion 15 on the right side surface and the back surface thereof. Although a specific illustration is omitted, a support shaft for cantilevering the ashtray 21 in a rotatable state is provided on the right side surface of the ashtray 21, and the ashtray 21 is disposed on the back as shown in the drawing. A locking portion that is locked to the base portion 15 is provided at a position that is open to the bottom. Most of the front plate 14 is formed of ABS resin in the same manner as the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but by molding with ABS resin, it is possible to apply plating to appropriate portions of the surface for the purpose of decoration or the like. In addition, since the ashtray 21 is disposed in the vicinity, the portion constituting the lower plate 16 and the back wall panel 17 is made of flame-retardant ABS resin, so that it is difficult to burn even if cigarettes are accidentally placed. It is preferable to configure as described above.

  A front door frame 13 as a front door is provided in a range excluding the front plate 14 on the front side of the main body frame 12 so as to cover the main body frame 12. Accordingly, the entire front side of the main body frame 12 is covered by the front plate 14 and the front door frame 13. The front door frame 13 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the main body frame 12, the front door frame 13 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis extending vertically to the left when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is like that. The front door frame 13 is formed of ABS resin, like the front plate 14. The front door frame 13 is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but by molding it with ABS resin, it is possible to plate appropriate portions of the surface for the purpose of decoration or the like.

  A lower portion of the front door frame 13 is provided with a bulging portion 22 that bulges to the near side above the lower plate 16, and an upper plate 23 that opens upward is provided inside the bulging portion 22. . The upper plate 23 is a ball receiving tray for temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching device side while aligning them in a row. A ball removal lever 24 for the upper plate 23 is provided on the front surface side of the bulging portion 22, and when this ball removal lever 24 is operated, a ball removal passage (not shown) provided near the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23. Is opened, and the stored balls in the upper plate 23 are discharged to the lower plate 16. In addition, the upper plate 23 can also be comprised with a flame-retardant ABS resin similarly to the lower plate 16 grade | etc.,. A push-type selection switch 108 that can be operated by a player is provided at the center of the front side of the bulging portion 22, and when this selection switch 108 is operated, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 described later is changed. It has become. In addition, the selection switch 108 has a built-in lamp (not shown), and in a situation where the selection operation is valid, the lamp is lit to notify that the selection operation is valid, and the selection operation is invalid. Under certain circumstances, it is turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a glass door frame and a front decoration frame are individually provided, and these can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame (corresponding to the main body frame of the present embodiment), and an upper plate is provided on the front decoration frame. Unlike the conventional configuration, the glass door frame and the front decoration frame are integrated into a front door frame 13, and the upper plate 23 is provided integrally with the front door frame 13. In this case, since the glass door frame and the front decoration frame are integrated into the front door frame 13, the strength of the glass support structure can be improved in the front door frame 13. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, for the purpose of expanding the game area, a large glass 137 is mounted on the front door frame 13 along with the expansion of the game area. Therefore, although the frame portion around the glass becomes narrow and there is a concern about the problem of strength reduction, sufficient strength of the glass support structure can be ensured by providing a frame portion integrated with the upper plate below the glass. The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the glass 137 are generally 405 mm × 405 mm, whereas the pachinko machine 10 has a size of 453 mm × 434 mm.

  The front door frame 13 is extended downward so as not to interfere with the game ball launching handle 18 at least when opening and closing the front door frame 13. Specifically, the dimension La from the lower end of the pachinko machine to the lower end of the front door frame 13 is, for example, about 201 mm in one existing model, whereas in this pachinko machine 10, it is about 30 mm smaller, about 172 mm. It has become. Along with this, the dimension Lb from the lower end of the pachinko machine to the upper end of the upper plate 23 is also reduced, which is about 298 mm in the existing model, for example, about 261 mm in the present pachinko machine 10. Here, by lowering the position of the upper plate 23, the vertical distance from the tip of the nozzle of the ball lending device arranged side by side on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall is increased, and there is a concern that the lending of the lending ball may be lost. However, in the present embodiment, the rising portion 22a in which the wall surface of the bulging portion 22 is higher than the other wall surface is formed in the left side portion that is the rental ball discharge portion from the nozzle. Thereby, even if it has the structure which lowered the position of the top plate 23, inconveniences, such as spilling of a rental ball, are eliminated. The height of the raised portion 22a may be any as long as it matches the lowered size of the upper plate 23, and the maximum height is 25 mm in the present embodiment.

  In the front door frame 13, the bulging portion 22 for forming the upper plate is provided so as to bulge greatly toward the front side, but other portions above the upper plate 23 (annular electric decoration portion 102 and the like to be described later) ) Is restricted to bulge to the near side to avoid interference with the nozzle of the ball lending device. Specifically, the dimension from the outer frame 11 toward the front side is limited to 45 to 50 mm.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main body frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 25 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially circular window hole 26 is formed at the center of the resin base 25. Is formed. A game board 30 is detachably mounted on the rear side of the resin base 25. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 30 is made of a substantially square plywood, and is attached in a state where the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the resin base 25. That is, the game board 30 is attached from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and only the substantially central portion of the front part of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 12 through the window hole 26 of the resin base 25. Note that the gaming board 30 has a length in the vertical direction of 476 mm and a length in the horizontal direction of 452 mm, as in the prior art.

  Next, the structure of the game board 30 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an operating port 33, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and the like. Actually, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the operating port 33, the through gate 34, and the variable display unit 35 are attached to the surface of the game board by wood screws or the like. In the present embodiment, the variable display unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 30, the operation port 33 is disposed below the variable display unit 35, and the variable winning device 32 is disposed further below. Further, through gates 34 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35, and a plurality of general winning holes 31 are arranged on both sides of the lower part of the game board 30. The operating port 33 is additionally provided with an electric accessory that is activated (opened) under a predetermined condition. When a game ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating port 33, it is detected by a detection switch which will be described later, and based on the detection result, the upper plate 23 (in some cases, the lower plate 16) is detected. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 36 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 30 so that game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are guided through the out port 36 toward a ball discharge path (not shown). It has become. The out port 36 is formed by cutting out the substantially lower center of the game board 30 in an inverted U shape. Therefore, compared to the conventional configuration in which the out port is formed in a hole shape, the out port can be easily formed (however, in FIG. 4, the rail unit 50 is provided on the front side so that the out port 36 is closed. Is shown). The game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (functions) such as a windmill 37 are disposed.

  Notches 38 as recesses are formed at a plurality of locations on the left and right sides of the game board 30 so as to avoid interference with the protruding areas from the left and right sides of the body frame 12 that is the assembly partner.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the position of the upper plate 23 is lowered, and accordingly, the position of the game ball intake port provided in the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23 is also lowered. In this case, in the conventional configuration in which the game ball inlet is at a relatively high position, the game ball inlet and the game board 30 overlap each other, and the game board 30 has a notch corresponding to the game ball inlet. In this pachinko machine 10, the game ball intake port and the game board 30 do not overlap each other by lowering the game ball intake port. No formation is necessary. Therefore, it becomes an advantageous configuration in the manufacturing process of the game board 30.

  The variable display unit 35 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that displays symbols in a variable manner with a winning at the operation port 33 as a trigger. A center frame 43 is disposed in the variable display unit 35 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 43 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. . In the upper center of the center frame 43, a first specific lamp portion 47 and a second specific lamp portion 48 are provided side by side. In addition, a holding lamp 44 corresponding to the first specific lamp section 47 and the symbol display device 41 is provided so as to sandwich the area where both the specific lamp sections 47 and 48 are disposed. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the operating port 33 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the holding number is displayed by turning on the holding lamp 44. Note that the hold lamp 44 may be configured to be variably displayed on a part of the symbol display device 41. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 43 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the holding lamp 44, the first specific lamp unit 47, and the second specific lamp unit 48 is hindered by the fall of the game ball. It is the composition which is not done. A holding lamp 46 corresponding to the second specific lamp portion 48 is provided below the center frame 43. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the holding number is displayed by turning on the holding lamp 46. Note that the hold lamp 46 may be configured to be variably displayed on a part of the symbol display device 41, similarly to the hold lamp 44.

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, a big hit is generated and the subsequent gaming state shifts to a big winning state as a special gaming state. This symbol variation display will be described in detail later. In addition to the liquid crystal display device, the symbol display device 41 may have a display screen made up of other types such as a CRT, a dot matrix, and 7 segments.

  The first specific lamp portion 47 is provided with red, green, and blue three-color light emitting type LEDs on the inside thereof. Then, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order using a winning at the operation port 33 as a trigger. Specifically, red light is turned on with a winning at the operation port 33 as a trigger, and the emission color is switched to green light when a predetermined time elapses in that state. Then, when the predetermined time elapses with the green light turned on, the emission color is switched to blue light. Thereafter, the emission color is repeatedly switched in the order of red, green, and blue until the emission color switching stop time comes. Accordingly, red, green, and blue are repeatedly displayed in this order on the first specific lamp unit 47. Finally, when red or green is stopped and displayed, the jackpot is generated and the subsequent gaming state shifts to the jackpot state. When blue is stopped and displayed, the jackpot is not generated and the jackpot is generated. Does not transition to the state. The switching of the emission color will be described in detail later.

  On the other hand, the second specific lamp portion 48 is provided with red and green two-color light emission type LEDs inside thereof. In the second specific lamp unit 48, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order with the passage of the through gate 34 as a trigger. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, lighting of red light and lighting of green light are alternately performed. Thus, red and green are alternately displayed on the second specific lamp unit 48. And when red is stopped and displayed, it is comprised so that the electrically-driven accessory which accompanies the operating port 33 will be in an open state only for the predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 32 is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in a normal state, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which the game ball is likely to win when it shifts to a big win state. More specifically, when the variable winning device 32 is in an open state, it becomes easy for a game ball to win a big winning opening of the variable winning device 32. Then, the variable winning device 32 is switched to the closed state based on the passage of the opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls as the closing condition is satisfied. The jackpot state is continued until the opening / closing of 15 rounds is performed, with the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 as one round. Note that the closed state of the variable winning device 32 may be a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win, instead of a state in which a game ball cannot win.

  A rail unit 50 is attached to the game board 30 as a rail member for guiding the game ball launched from the game ball launching device to the upper part of the game board 30. The launched game ball is guided to a predetermined game area through the rail unit 50. The rail unit 50 is formed of a ring-shaped resin molded product, and more specifically, a fluorine-containing polycarbonate resin is used to reduce frictional resistance. The rail unit 50 includes an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 that are provided in an inner and outer double. The inner rail portion 51 is formed in a substantially annular shape except for about 1/4 of the upper portion, and the outer rail portion 52 surrounds the upper open area of the inner rail portion 51 and is parallel to the left side portion of the inner rail 51. Are formed in a substantially semi-annular shape.

  The inner rail portion 51 is integrally formed with other resin portions, and is provided upright substantially vertically on the surface of the game board 30. Further, the outer rail portion 52 has a support portion 52a that is integrally molded with other resin portions in the same manner as the inner rail portion 51, and is provided substantially upright on the surface of the game board 30. A sliding plate 52b is attached to the inner surface of 52a to make the flight of the game ball smoother. The sliding plate 52b is made of a long metal strip made of stainless steel, and is supported by the support portion 52a at a plurality of locations. In such a case, a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a ball guide passage is formed by a portion where these rail portions 51 and 52 face each other with a predetermined interval. In addition, in the site | part which the inner and outer rail parts 51 and 52 oppose, each rail part 51 and 52 is connected by the contact part 53 with the game board 30, and a ball | bowl guide path is formed in the groove shape open | released to the near side. Has been.

  In the rail unit 50, a return ball prevention member 54 is attached to a portion (left upper portion in FIG. 4) from which the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage, and a portion corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the jumped game ball (FIG. 4). In the upper right part), a return rubber 55 is attached. The return ball preventing member 54 prevents a situation in which a game ball that has once jumped from the ball guide path to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the ball guide path. In addition, the game ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 55 and is rebounded toward the center of the game area.

  An arc-shaped flange 56 projecting outward is formed on the outer periphery of the rail unit 50. The flange 56 constitutes a mounting surface for the game board 30. When the rail unit 50 is attached to the game board 30, the flange 56 is brought into contact with the game board 30, and in this state, screws or the like are inserted into a plurality of through holes formed in the flange 56. The rail unit 50 is fastened to 30. Here, the upper and lower and left and right ends of the rail unit 50 are formed in a substantially linear shape. That is, the flanges 56 are cut off at the upper and lower and left and right ends of the rail unit 50 so that the rail diameter can be expanded in a finite area in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the game area on the game board 30 can be expanded. It has become. The rail unit 50 is arranged such that the position of the gaming area on the gaming board 30 that is the maximum width reaches the left and right end positions of the gaming board 30. Among the parts corresponding to the ball guide passages of the rail unit 50, particularly with respect to the game ball receiving part, the corresponding flange 56 is provided from others in order to firmly attach the rail unit 50 and stabilize the flight of the game ball. There are also many screws (three in this embodiment, two in the other).

  A convex portion 57 is formed at the entrance of the ball guide passage between the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 so as to close a part of the ball guide passage. The convex portion 57 is formed so as to extend downward from the outer peripheral portion of the inner rail portion 51, and has a function of guiding a foul ball that does not reach the game area and flows backward in the ball guide passage to the foul ball passage 76 (see FIG. 3). Have The lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30 are spaces (Sa, Sb in the figure) for sticking seals and plates such as certificate stamps, and in order to secure this attachment space, the flange 56 Notches 58a and 58b are formed in the upper and lower portions. By adopting a configuration in which a sticker such as a stamp is directly pasted on the game board 30, it is difficult to improperly paste the stamp or the like.

  In the game board 30, a relay terminal hole 59 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided in the upper left portion outside the rail unit 50, and through this relay terminal hole 59, a connector for connecting a relay terminal plate installed on the back of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the game area will be described. The board surface of the game board 30 is divided into inner and outer areas by rail units 50 (inner and outer rail portions 51 and 52), and an inner area divided into a substantially circular shape is a game area. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game area partitioned on the board surface of the game board 30 is configured to be much larger than before. In the present embodiment, the distance from the uppermost point of the outer rail portion 52 to the lower part of the game board 30 is 445 mm (58 mm longer than the conventional product), and the extreme left position of the outer rail portion 52 to the extreme right position of the inner rail portion 51. The distance between them is 435 mm (50 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the extreme left position of the inner rail portion 51 to the extreme right position of the inner rail portion 51 is 418 mm.

  In the present embodiment, the game area is an area of a ball guide passage that is an opposite part of the inner and outer rail parts 51 and 52 among the areas surrounded by the inner rail part 51 and the outer rail part 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It demonstrates as an area | region which excluded. That is, since the game area does not include the ball guide passage portion, the left limit position toward the game area is specified not by the outer rail part 52 but by the inner rail part 51. Further, the right limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail portion 51, the lower limit position of the game area is specified by the lower end position of the game board 30 in which the out port 36 is formed, and the upper limit position of the game area. Is specified by the outer rail portion 52. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width of the game area (maximum width in the left-right direction) is 418 mm, and the height of the game area (maximum width in the vertical direction) is 445 mm.

  Here, the width of the gaming area is preferably at least 380 mm. More preferably, it is 400 mm or more, 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and further 460 mm or more. That is, the width dimension of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of game area expansion. The height of the game area is preferably at least 400 mm. More preferably, it is 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and more preferably 460 mm or more. Of course, it is good also as 470 mm or more or 480 mm or more. In other words, the height of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of game area expansion. In addition, about the combination of the said width | variety and height, it can be set as what combined the said numerical value arbitrarily. If the width or height of the game area exceeds a certain value, a part of the game area may exceed the board surface of the game board 30, but other members may be placed along the game board surface in the area beyond the game area. What is necessary is just to supplement by providing.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the area of the game area to the surface of the game board 30 is about 70%, which is much larger than the conventional area ratio. Note that the area ratio of the game area to the surface of the game board 30 has been only about 50% in the related art, so that the game board 30 having the same size as the conventional one is used as in the present embodiment. So, it can be said that the game area is considerably expanded. It should be noted that the external shape of the pachinko machine 10 is almost uniform among manufacturers for the convenience of installation in the game hall, and in the situation where the size of the game board 30 has to be the same, the surface of the game board 30 as described above. Increasing the ratio of the area of the gaming area to about 20% is very significant from the viewpoint of expanding the gaming area. Here, the ratio is preferably at least 60% or more. More preferably, it is 65% or more, More preferably, it is 70% or more. Further, if it is 75% or more exceeding the case of this embodiment, it is more desirable. Furthermore, it may be 80% or more. In order to secure 80% or more, it is difficult to make the shape of the game area into a substantially circular shape. Therefore, it is preferable to have a shape in which the corner (for example, the lower right corner or the upper right corner) is expanded. .

  Further, the ratio of the area of the game area to the area of the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is about 40%, which is a much larger area ratio than before. The area ratio of the game area to the area of the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is desirably 35% or more. Of course, it may be 40% or more, 45% or more, or 50% or more.

  In connection with the expansion of the game area, the through gates 34 located on both sides of the variable display unit 35 have a guide mechanism that allows the game balls that have passed through the gate 34 to be moved toward the center. As a result, even when the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be guided toward the central operation port 33 and the variable prize-winning device 32, and thus the game area is expanded. As a result, a decrease in interest due to the difficulty of winning a game ball is suppressed. Further, since the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, even if a relatively large variable display unit 35 is provided at the center of the game area, the through-gate 34, the windmill 37, and a plurality of nails are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35. (Guide nails such as a triangular nail for guiding the game ball to the center) and other objects can be provided with a margin, and the flow of the game ball in the game areas on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35 It is not monotonous and you can fully enjoy the behavior of the game ball.

  Notches 38 are formed on both the left and right sides of the game board 30 to avoid interference with the protruding areas from the left and right sides of the main body frame 12, and the maximum width of the game area on the game board 30 in the rail unit 50 It has already been described that the position reaches the left and right end positions of the game board 30, but as will be described later, reinforcing members (bearing brackets 235: FIG. 9) provided on the left and right side portions of the main body frame 12. The game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to have a width that leaves an area for arranging the locking device (the base frame 247, the interlocking rod 248, etc .: see FIG. 9). For these reasons, the game area is being expanded.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 3, in the resin base 25, below the window hole 26 (game board 30), a launch rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched from the game ball launcher is attached. Yes. The firing rail 61 is fixedly attached to the resin base 25 via a metal plate 62 behind the firing rail 61, and is configured to extend linearly at a predetermined firing angle (launch angle). Accordingly, the game ball that is launched in accordance with the turning operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is first launched obliquely upward along the launch rail 61 and then guided to the game area through the ball guide path. As described above, since the curvature of the ball guide passage is reduced by greatly expanding the game area as compared with the conventional game area, a device for stabilizing the launch ball is required. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the launch position of the game ball is lowered so that the inclination angle (launch angle) of the launch rail 61 is somewhat larger than the existing one (that is, the launch rail 61 is raised), and By forming the launch rail 61 so as to extend from the launch position of the game ball launcher to a position beyond the center position (out port 36) of the game area, the launch rail 61 is made longer than the existing one and sufficiently long. The ball guide distance is secured. Thereby, the game ball launched from the game ball launching device can be guided to the ball guide passage in a more stable state. Further, in order to stabilize the launch ball, the metal plate 62 provided with the launch rail 61 is enlarged, and the metal plate 62 is screwed at a number of locations (15 to 20 in this embodiment). Thus, the launch rail 61 is firmly positioned with respect to the game board 30.

  There is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 and the ball guide passage, and a foul ball passage 76 is provided below the gap. Therefore, if the game ball launched from the game ball launching device does not reach the return ball prevention member 54 and returns as a foul ball in the ball guide passage, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 76 to the lower plate 16. To be discharged. Incidentally, in the case of the present embodiment, the length of the firing rail 61 is about 240 mm, and the length of the gap (the length on the extension line of the firing rail 61) leading to the foul ball passage 76 at the tip of the firing rail is about 40 mm. .

  When the foul balls flow backward in the ball guide passage, most of them flow along the outer rail portion 52 and fall downward when reaching the lower end portion of the outer rail portion 52. There is also a rampage in the ball guide path that jumps to the inner rail portion 51 side. At this time, the splashed foul ball hits the convex portion 57 at the entrance of the ball guide passage and is guided to the foul ball passage 76. Thereby, all of the foul balls are reliably guided to the foul ball passage 76, and interference between the foul balls and the game balls to be fired next is suppressed.

  Although detailed disclosure of the drawings is omitted, one game ball is supplied to the game ball launching device one by one from the ball outlet on the front door frame 13 side (ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23). At this time, since the launch position of the game ball is lowered in this embodiment, the drop from the exit of the ball on the front door frame 13 side to the launch position becomes large, Guide members 63 and 64 are installed on the front side. Thereby, the game ball supplied from the ball exit on the front door frame 13 side is always set at a predetermined launch position, and a stable launch operation can be realized. In addition, the game ball launching device is provided with a ball striking rod that is supported so as to be rotatable about the base end portion, and a game ball is launched along with the rotation of the ball striking ball. It is rare. Therefore, while aiming to reduce the weight of the hitting ball by changing the material to a light metal such as aluminum and reducing the size of the hitting shaft, the head portion of the hitting ball (opposite to the base end) is required to ensure sufficient firing force A weight is provided at the tip of the side. Thereby, sufficient and stable launch of the game ball can be realized. By providing the weight portion of the hitting ball projecting upward, the hitting ball can be easily picked or caught, and the effect of facilitating adjustment of the hitting strength of the hitting tip can be obtained.

  In addition, a pair of left and right discharge ports 66 and 67 are formed on the left side of the launch rail 61 on the front surface of the main body frame 12, and the game balls discharged from the discharge ports 66 and 67 are placed in front of the upper plate 23 or A game ball guide unit 70 for guiding one of the lower dishes 16 is attached. For convenience, in the following description, the discharge port 66 is also referred to as a first discharge port, and the discharge port 67 is also referred to as a second discharge port. These discharge ports 66 and 67 communicate with a game ball distribution unit 245 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back surface of the main body frame 12, and game balls are basically discharged from the first discharge port 66. When the passage leading to the upper plate 23 including the first outlet 66 is filled with game balls, the game balls are discharged from the second outlet 67 instead of the first outlet 66.

  The game ball guide unit 70 is configured to be visible with a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate resin, and between the main body frame 12 and the front door frame 13 with the front door frame 13 closed with respect to the main body frame 12. It is formed so that the thickness is comparatively thin so that it can be accommodated. The game ball guide unit 70 is integrally formed with the foul ball passage 76 described above. The game ball guide unit 70 is formed with a ball discharge passage 71 for communicating the discharge ports 66 and 67 with the lower plate 16. In the game ball guide unit 70, a communication port 72 communicating with the upper plate 23 is formed on the front side of the first discharge port 66 of the main body frame 12, and an opening / closing plate 73 is attached so as to close the communication port 72. ing. The opening / closing plate 73 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 74 and is always urged to a position where the communication port 72 is closed by a spring 75 as urging means.

  According to the above configuration of the game ball guide unit 70, the open / close plate 73 rises as shown in the figure by the urging force of the spring 75 when the front door frame 13 is opened, and the communication port 72 is closed. In this state, the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 66 is guided to the lower plate 16 through the ball discharge passage 71. Therefore, when the front door frame 13 is opened in a state where game balls are stored upstream of the communication port 72, the stored balls flow down to the lower plate 16 through the ball discharge passage 71 without spilling from the communication port 72. To do. That is, even in the present pachinko machine 10 in which the front decorative frame is omitted and the upper plate 23 is directly provided on the front door frame 13, the game on the upstream side of the communication port 72 when the front door frame 13 is opened. The inconvenience of spilling a ball can be prevented. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 13 is closed, the opening / closing plate 73 is pushed open against the biasing force of the spring 75 by the ball passage rod 138 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 13. . In this state, the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 66 is guided to the upper plate 23 through the communication port 72. Accordingly, the game ball upstream of the communication port 72 is paid out to the upper plate 23. A lower plate full tank switch for detecting that the game ball discharged to the lower plate 16 is full (full tank) is attached to the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 71 of the game ball guide unit 70.

  The resin base 25 is provided with a substantially rectangular small window 78 at the lower right portion of the window hole 26. Accordingly, the stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner space (Sa in FIG. 4) of the game board 30 can be viewed through the small window 78. It is also possible to directly paste a stamp or the like on the game board 30 from the small window 78.

  A small window 79 is also provided in the resin base 25 at the upper left portion of the window hole 26. The small window 79 is provided in the position corresponding to the relay terminal hole 59 of the game board 30 described in FIG. 4 in substantially the same shape as that, and through the relay terminal hole 59 and the small window 79, the relay installed on the back of the game board The connection connector 60 of the terminal board is exposed on the front side of the main body frame 12. In such a configuration, various lamps provided on the front door frame 13 side are electrically connected via the connection connector 60 exposed from the small window 79 of the main body frame 12 (resin base 25). A front door frame opening switch 27 for detecting the open state of the front door frame 13 is provided on the top of the resin base 25. The front door frame opening switch 27 has a pin that can be projected and retracted on the front surface of the resin base 25. When the front door frame 13 is opened with respect to the main body frame 12, the pin returns to the protruding position and the opening of the front door frame 13 is detected. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the resin base 25 comes into contact with metal fittings (reinforcing plates 131 to 134 shown in FIG. 5) on the back of the front door frame 13, and Metal pieces 28a and 28b are attached for conducting the metal fittings to the main body frame 12 side and grounding them. Accordingly, the metal fittings on the back of the front door frame 13 are conducted to the locking device and the hinge fitting on the main body frame 12 side through the metal pieces 28a and 28b, and are grounded together with the locking device and the hinge fitting.

  A pair of upper and lower support brackets 81 and 82 are attached to the left end side (opening / closing axis line side) of the main body frame 12 as a support mechanism for supporting the front door frame 13 so that it can be opened and closed. The upper support fitting 81 is provided with a support hole 83 having a notch on the front side, and the lower support fitting 82 is provided with a protruding shaft 84 protruding upward. The specific configuration of the front door frame 13 supported by the support fittings 81 and 82 will be described later. Further, a pair of upper and lower metal fittings 155 and 156 (see FIG. 2) provided on the open end side on the back side of the front door frame 13 is inserted into the right end side (opposite to the opening / closing axis) of the main body frame 12. Insertion holes 87 and 88 are provided, respectively. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a locking device for locking the main body frame 12 and the front door frame 13 is hidden behind the main body frame 12. Therefore, the front door frame 13 is locked to the main body frame 12 so that it cannot be opened by locking the metal fittings 155 and 156 to the locking device via the insertion holes 87 and 88.

  A cylinder lock 91 as a key member for locking and unlocking the main frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and locking and unlocking the front door frame 13 with respect to the main frame 12 is installed at the lower right corner of the main frame 12. Has been. The cylinder lock 91 is integrated with the locking device, and only the cylinder lock 91 of the locking device is provided in a state of protruding in front of the main body frame 12. In this case, the cylinder lock 91 is provided at a position different from the position that is the maximum width of the game area. The cylinder lock 91 has a function to cover both the locking and unlocking of the main body frame 12 and the locking and unlocking of the front door frame 13, and when the key inserted into the key hole is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise direction) When the key is unlocked and the key is turned to the right (clockwise direction), the front door frame 13 is unlocked.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a vertically long cover member 92 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to surround the cylinder lock 91. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the cover member 92 has locking portions (hooks) formed at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. Therefore, the cover member 92 is attached to the main body frame 12 by locking the upper locking portion to the main body frame 12 side and sandwiching the lower locking portion between the main body frame 12 and the front plate 14. . The front door frame 13 is formed with a notch 145 corresponding to the shape of the cover member 92. When the front door frame 13 is closed, the cover member 92 together with the front door frame 13 constitutes the front portion of the pachinko machine. . When the front door frame 13 is closed, the flange formed on the cover member 92 is pressed by the front door frame 13 to prevent the cover member 92 from rattling.

  Next, the front door frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the front door frame 13.

  The front door frame 13 is formed with a window portion 101 as a viewing window so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 101 has a substantially oval shape that is nearly circular, and more specifically, a substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the window portion 101 is gently curved as compared to the upper and lower sides. The substantially central portion may have a linear shape. Above the window part 101 of the front door frame 13, the frame width of the narrowest part is about 61 mm. The frame width dimension in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the distance between the uppermost part of the outer rail portion 52 (the upper end of the game area) and the upper end of the main body frame 12 in the main body frame 12, and is 85 mm to This is significantly shorter than the conventional model having the frame width of about 95 mm. Thereby, the visibility of the upper area in the game area can be easily ensured, and the large variable display unit 35 can also be arranged relatively upward. The dimension of the frame width (narrowest part) above the window 101 is desirably 80 mm or less, more desirably 70 mm or less, and further desirably 60 mm or less. Of course, as long as a predetermined strength can be secured, the thickness may be 50 mm or less.

  The left and right frame portions of the front door frame 13 are restricted in reducing the frame width, and need a sufficient width dimension to ensure the strength of the front door frame 13 itself and the glass support strength. In the present embodiment, the narrowest part of the left and right frame parts has a frame width of about 44 mm. In this case, since the game area is greatly expanded in the pachinko machine 10, the frame width of the front door frame 13 is about 44 mm as described above on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, on the opening / closing axis side. On the other hand, the distance between the left end position of the outer rail portion 52 of the rail unit 50 and the left end position of the main body frame 12 is about 21 mm, and the latter dimension is considerably small. That is, in this configuration, in a state where the front door frame 13 is closed, a part of the ball guide passage overlaps and is covered with the left frame portion of the front door frame 13. However, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the ball guide passage, the ball guide passage is only a passing area until the game ball is guided to the game area, and the game where the player mainly enjoys the game. The game ball is not difficult to see in the area. Therefore, there is no trouble in actual game. As described above, it is possible to expand the game area without causing any trouble to the game, while ensuring sufficient strength and glass support strength of the front door frame 13.

  Small windows 107 to which a transparent resin is attached are provided on both the left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door frame 13 so that a part of the surface of the main body frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 (including certificate paper) can be visually recognized. The transparent resin attached to the small window 107 is formed in a flat shape so that the inside certificate paper or the like can be easily read by a machine or the like. However, a magnifying lens portion can be provided on the small window 107 so that the hall operator or the like can easily see the internal certificate paper or the like.

  The front door frame 13 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking in a big hit state or at a predetermined reach performance. For example, an annular illumination part 102 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs is provided symmetrically along the periphery of the window part 101, and an LED or the like is provided at the center of the annular illumination part 102 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10. There is provided a central illumination unit 103 incorporating the light emitting means. In the pachinko machine 10, the central illumination unit 103 functions as a jackpot lamp, and notifies that the jackpot state has been reached by turning on or blinking under the jackpot state. Further, around the upper plate 23, there is also provided an upper plate illumination unit 104 that also incorporates light emitting means such as LEDs. In addition, on the left and right sides of the central illumination unit 103, there are respectively provided a prize ball lamp 105 that is lit during award ball payout and an error display lamp 106 that is lit when a predetermined error occurs. The annular illumination part 102 includes an inner and outer double resin cover layer and a light emitting body (LED) with a launch plate accommodated inside the resin cover layer, and intersects the inner side surface of each resin cover layer vertically and horizontally in each layer. A protrusion (or a wavy protrusion) is provided in the direction of the protrusion. The outer resin cover layer is transparent, and the inner resin cover layer is colored. Therefore, if the annular illumination part 102 is caused to emit light, it is possible to realize the illumination in a state of being dispersed in a large number or in a state accompanied with a stereoscopic effect. A resin material containing glass powder may be used for the resin cover layer. Such a configuration of the resin cover layer can also be applied to other electric decoration parts (for example, the central electric decoration part 103 and the prize ball lamp 105).

  The front door frame 13 is provided with a ball rental operation portion 120 at a position below the window portion 101. The ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a frequency display unit 123. A ball lending operation, a card return operation, and a card frequency check can be performed by the lending operation unit 120 in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (a ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. it can. That is, the ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is paid out as long as the remaining amount exists on the card or the like. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. The frequency display unit 123 displays remaining amount information such as a card. In a pachinko machine (so-called cash machine) in which game balls are rented directly from a ball lending device or the like to a top plate without using a card unit, the ball lending operation unit 120 is unnecessary. A decorative sticker or the like is attached to 120 installation portions. Thereby, in the configuration of the present pachinko machine 10 provided with the lending operation unit 120, the pachinko machine using a card unit (so-called CR machine) and the cash machine can be shared.

  On the back side of the front door frame 13, various metal reinforcing members are provided so as to surround the window portion 101. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, reinforcement plates 131, 132, 133, and 134 are respectively attached to the back side of the front door frame 13 and on the left and right and upper and lower outer sides of the window portion 101. These reinforcing plates 131 to 134 are connected in contact with each other, but resin parts 135 for avoiding direct contact are interposed at the connecting portions of the left and upper reinforcing plates 132 and 133 in the drawing. Thereby, the closed loop of the electric path by the reinforcing plates 131 to 134 is cut, and the generation of a magnetic field causing noise is prevented.

  Assembling mechanisms for the main body frame 12 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing plate 131 on the opening / closing axis line on the right side of FIG. Then, the mounting brackets 151 and 152 on the front door frame 13 side are attached to the support brackets 81 and 82 (see FIG. 3) on the main body frame 12 side. That is, a shaft hole that opens to the lower surface is formed in the lower mounting bracket 152, and the protruding shaft 84 of the lower support bracket 82 is inserted into the shaft hole, while the upper mounting bracket 151 By inserting the shaft portion into the support hole 83 of the upper support fitting 81, the front door frame 13 is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 12. Further, the reinforcing plate 131 is provided with an engaging claw 131a having a hook shape at an intermediate position thereof, and the engaging claw 131a is formed in the hole 12a ( (See FIG. 3). Thereby, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front door frame 13 is configured in a form including the upper plate 23 and the upper and lower shaft support intervals thereof are increased, the front door frame 13 can be prevented from being lifted at the intermediate position. Therefore, an illegal act or the like floating the front door frame 13 is suppressed.

  A pair of upper and lower hook metal fittings 155 and 156 having a hook shape are attached to the reinforcing plate 132 on the opposite side to the open / close axis on the left side of FIG. These metal fittings 155 and 156 extend rearward and are provided so as to correspond to the insertion holes 87 and 88 (see FIG. 3) provided in the main body frame 12. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the metal fittings 155 and 156 are inserted into the insertion holes 87 and 88 on the main body frame 12 side, and are locked by the locking device.

  A resin case 136 is attached to the lower reinforcing plate 134 at a position facing the firing rail 61. The resin case 136 accommodates a circuit board for the ball rental operation unit 120. The back surface of the resin case 136 (the surface visible in FIG. 5) is flat, and constitutes the side wall of the firing rail 61 when the front door frame 13 is closed. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from spilling forward from the launch rail 61.

  A ball passage rod 138 is installed at a part of the lower reinforcing plate 134 cut out toward the back of the pachinko machine 10, and at least above the ball passage rod 138, also at the back of the pachinko machine 10. An eaves portion 139 extending toward the surface is provided. In this case, in a state where the front door frame 13 is closed on the main body frame 12 side, a ridge extending along the upper side of the communication port 72 on the main body frame 12 side enters between the ball passage rod 138 and the collar portion 139. Arranged. Therefore, even if a wire, a film, or the like is invaded from the ball passage rod 138 and an illegal act is attempted, it is very difficult to infiltrate the wire, the film, or the like into the game area. As a result, fraudulent acts performed using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented.

  The reinforcing plates 131 to 134 described above also have a function as a metal frame for supporting the glass, and the inside of these reinforcing plates 131 to 134 is folded back to form a glass holding groove. The glass holding grooves are formed in two rows on the front and rear sides, and a pair of front and rear glasses 137 having a rectangular shape are held in each glass holding groove. Thereby, the two glass 137 is attached to the front and back at a predetermined interval.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is designed to expand the game area. Therefore, when the front door frame 13 is closed, the ball guide formed between the inner and outer rail portions 51 and 52 is used. A part of the passage is covered with the front door frame 13. Therefore, in the ball guide passage, a portion where the opening portion on the near side cannot be covered with the glass 137 is formed. In such a case, for example, when the game ball launched from the game ball launching device returns without reaching the return ball prevention member 54, the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage or between the outer rail portion 52 and the glass 137. There is a risk of getting caught in a gap that can be made. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a rail cover 140 is attached to the front door frame 13 so as to cover the front side opening portion of the ball guide passage. The rail cover 140 is a plate having a substantially arc shape, and is formed of a transparent resin. The rail cover 140 has an arc shape corresponding to the shape of the spherical guide passage, and covers the section from the base end portion of the spherical guide passage to the vicinity of the distal end portion along the peripheral edge portion of the window portion 101. ing. In particular, the size and shape of the rail cover 140 on the inner diameter side substantially match those of the inner rail portion 51. Further, at the right end portion of the rail cover 140 (that is, the portion that becomes the right end in the state of FIG. 5 where the rail cover 140 is attached to the front door frame 13), the portion where the ball guide passage protrudes from the side edge portion of the glass 137 A covering portion 141 for covering the surface is provided. With the above-described configuration of the rail cover 140, when the front door frame 13 is closed, the back surface of the rail cover 140 covers almost the entire area of the ball guide passage, so that the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as being caught in a gap formed between the outer rail portion 52 and the glass 137.

  Further, on the lower back side of the rail cover 140, a ridge 142 extending in an arc shape along the inner edge and protruding rearward is formed. The protrusion 142 is disposed so as to overlap the inner rail portion 51 in a state of entering the ball guide passage when the front door frame 13 is closed. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to cheat by inserting a wire or film from the gap between the front door frame 13 and the main body frame 12, the wire or film is allowed to enter the game area inside the ball guide passage. Becomes very difficult. As a result, fraudulent acts performed using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented. The protrusion 142 may be formed in a wider range, for example, along the entire area of the inner edge of the rail cover 140. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to infiltrate a wire, a film, or the like in a wider range, It is possible to more reliably prevent fraudulent acts that are performed using wires or films.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 for each major part.

  First, an overall outline of the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10, various control devices (various control boards) are arranged so as to be lined up and down, left and right, or overlapped in the front and rear, and a game ball supply device for supplying game balls (Discharge mechanism), a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, the various control devices are separately mounted on two mounting bases to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually attached to the main body frame 12 or the back of the game board 30. ing. In this case, the main controller 271 (main board) and the audio lamp controller 272 (audio lamp control board) are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the payout controller 311 (payout control board) and launch control. A device 312 (launch control board) and a power supply device 313 (power supply board) are mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the former unit is referred to as a “first control board unit 201” and the latter unit is referred to as a “second control board unit 202”. Further, since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are also integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203” herein. The detailed configuration of each unit 201 to 203 will be described later.

  The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured to be detachable without using any tools or the like in units of units, and are provided with a support shaft part in a part to provide the main body frame 12. Or it has the composition which can be developed to the back of game board 30. This is also a device for making it possible to easily check a hidden portion when the units 201 to 203 and other components are arranged one behind the other. Actually, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 8, the first control board unit 201 having a substantially L-shape is arranged at substantially the center of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 202 is arranged therebelow. Yes. Further, the back pack unit 203 is disposed in a region partially overlapping with the first control board unit 201.

  The first control board unit 201 is provided with a support shaft part M1 at the left end portion when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the first control board unit 201 can be rotated around an axis A by the support shaft part M1. ing. Further, the first control board unit 201 is provided with a fastening portion M2 made of Nylatch (registered trademark) on the right end portion thereof, that is, on the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M1, and with a locking claw at the upper end portion. A portion M3 is provided, and the first control board unit 201 is held along the back surface of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 by the fastening portion M2 and the locking claw portion M3. Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a support shaft part M4 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 202 can be rotated around the axis B by the support shaft part M4. It has become. Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a fastening portion M5 made of a ny latch or the like at the left end portion thereof, that is, the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M4, and the second control board unit 202 performs the second control. The substrate unit 202 is held in a state along the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a support shaft part M6 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 203 is rotatable about an axis C by the support shaft part M6. . Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a fastening portion M7 made of a ny latch or the like on the left end portion thereof, that is, on the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M6, and at the upper end portion and the lower end portion, respectively, a rotating engagement member. Stop portions M8 and M9 are provided, and the back pack unit 203 is held along the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 main body by the fastening portions M7 and the locking portions M8 and M9.

  The support shafts M1, M4, and M6 that rotatably support the units 201 to 203 have a hinge structure that can be easily removed while the units 201 to 203 are opened from the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. Briefly, the first control board unit 201 is developed by releasing the fastening of the fastening part M2 and the locking claw part M3 and rotating the unit 201 around the axis A, Lift in condition. Thereby, if there is no back pack unit 203, the first control board unit 201 can be removed. Further, with respect to the second control board unit 202, the fastening of the fastening portion M5 is released, the unit 202 is rotated about the axis B, is unfolded, and is lifted in that state. Thereby, the 2nd control board unit 202 can be removed. Further, with respect to the back pack unit 203, the fastening portion M7 and the locking portions M8 and M9 are unlocked, and the unit 203 is unfolded by rotating around the axis C and lifted in that state. Thereby, the back pack unit 203 can be removed.

  Here, the unfolding directions of the units 201 to 203 are not the same, and the first control board unit 201 opens to the left when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, whereas the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit. 203 is configured to open to the right. In this case, since the first control board unit 201 is partially overlapped with the back pack unit 203, it is impossible to remove the first control board unit 201 without opening the back pack unit 203. Furthermore, since the first control board unit 201 and the back pack unit 203 are configured to expand in opposite directions, the back pack unit 203 must be opened largely beyond a predetermined angle or the unit 203 must be removed. For example, it is impossible to remove the first control board unit 201. Accordingly, when attention is paid to removing the first control board unit 201, it is difficult to remove compared to the other units 202 and 203. Furthermore, since the back pack unit 203 cannot be opened unless the main body frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 by key operation of the locking device, the first control board unit 201 is further removed. Has become difficult. A more specific configuration will be described later.

  Next, the back surface structure of the main body frame 12 and the game board 30 is demonstrated. 9 is a rear view showing a configuration in a state in which the game board 30 is assembled to the main body frame 12 and the units 201 to 203 are removed. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the main body frame 12 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board 30 as viewed from the rear.

  The game board 30 is installed in a square frame-shaped installation area surrounded by the resin base 25 from the back side, and a plurality (four in this embodiment) of locking fixtures 211 and 212 provided on the main body frame 12. It is fixed so as not to fall backward. The locking fixtures 211 and 212 can be manually rotated, and can be switched between a fixed position (lock position) and a fixed release position (unlock position). FIG. 9 shows a locked state. The left and right three locking fixtures 211 are L-shaped metal fittings formed by bending metal pieces, and are configured not to protrude outward from the main body frame 12 when the game board 30 is fixed. Note that the locking fixture 212 at one lower portion is an I-shaped fastener made of synthetic resin.

  The variable display unit 35 disposed at the center of the game board 30 is provided with a synthetic resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 43 (see FIG. 4) from the rear side. A symbol display device 41 and a display control device 214 as display control means are detachably attached to the rear end in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 43 are disposed.

  A collective board unit 215 is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 35. The collective plate unit 215 has a base formed of a synthetic resin such as ABS resin as a thin plate-like frame body, and is attached so that the base surface is in contact with the back surface of the game board 30. The collective board unit 215 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won at various winning ports, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls at various winning ports, and the like. .

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. Below the collective plate unit 215, a collecting passage corresponding to the game board opening of the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating port 33 and collecting at one place on the downstream side. 216 is formed. Further, a discharge passage board 217 made of synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin is attached to the main body frame 12 below the game board 30, and the discharge ball is placed on the discharge passage board 217, for example, in a game hall outside the pachinko machine 10. A discharge passage 218 is formed to guide the island facility or the like. Therefore, as illustrated in phantom lines in FIG. 9, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 31 and the like gather through the collecting passage 216 of the collecting plate unit 215, and further, the discharging passage 218 of the discharging passage board 217 Through the pachinko machine 10. Similarly, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage 218, and the game ball that has not won any prize opening is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge passage 218. In the above configuration, with the lower end surface of the game board 30 as a boundary, the collective plate unit 215 (collection passage 216) is provided above, and the discharge passage board 217 (discharge passage 218) is provided below. There is no overlap in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 30. Therefore, when the game board 30 is removed from the main body frame 12, there is no inconvenience that the discharge passage board 17 prevents the game board from being removed.

  The discharge passage board 217 is disposed on the back side of the upper plate 23 in front of the pachinko machine 10, and a wire, a film, or the like is inserted from a ball discharge port (ball passage rod 138 in FIG. 2) leading to the upper plate 23. An illegal act such as allowing the wire, film, or the like to enter the game area side through the gap between the main body frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217 can be considered. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 10, the discharge passage board 217 has a height position corresponding to the upper position of the ball passage rod 138 so as to overlap the main body frame 12 and in front of the pachinko machine 10. An extending plate 219 was provided. Therefore, even if it tries to infiltrate a wire, a film, etc. from the clearance gap between the main body frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217, it will be obstructed by the plate 219, and it will be very difficult to infiltrate a wire, a film, etc. to a game area. Become. As a result, an illegal act such as forcibly opening the variable winning device 32 using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented.

  The winning detection mechanism will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, the collective board unit 215 is provided with a winning port switch 221 at a position corresponding to the general winning port 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and corresponds to the variable winning device 32. A count switch 223 is provided at the position. The count switch 223 is a switch that counts the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32. In addition, an operation port switch 224 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the operation port 33 is provided at a position corresponding to the operation port 33, and a passage of the game ball of the through gate 34 is detected at a position corresponding to the through gate 34. A gate switch 225 is provided. The winning opening switch 221 and the gate switch 225 are connected to the board relay board 226 through electric wiring, and the count switch 223 is connected to the big winning opening relay board 227. The board surface relay board 226 and the special winning opening relay board 227 are connected to the main controller 271. The operation port switch 224 is directly connected to the main controller 271 without using a relay board. Although not shown in the drawings, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the opening / closing door of the large winning opening, and the operating opening 33 is used for opening an electric accessory associated therewith. An operating port solenoid is provided.

  Here, the operation when the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device is opened or closed will be briefly described. When the big prize opening solenoid is not energized, the opening / closing door of the big prize opening is held in a standing state so as to close the big prize opening. On the other hand, when the big prize opening solenoid is excited, the open / close door tilts forward of the gaming machine and the big prize opening is opened. Thereafter, when the excitation of the special winning opening solenoid ends, the open / close door returns to the upright direction and the special winning opening is closed.

  The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control device 271, and a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is sent from the main control device 271 to the payout control device 311. Sent. The payout of the predetermined number of game balls is executed by the output of the payout control device 311.

  The collective board unit 215 is provided with a board external terminal board 230 at the upper right part thereof. The panel external terminal board 230 has an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a change in design stops (determined), an output terminal for outputting a signal when a big hit state occurs, and a signal output under a big hit state Output terminals. And, through these output terminals, a signal relating to the game (the state on the game board 30 side) is output to the management control device on the game hall side. The board external terminal board 230 is attached to the assembly board unit 215 in an easily removable state. As shown in FIG. 9, a set handle 228 and a firing motor 229 including a hitting ball basket are provided on the lower left side on the back side of the main body frame 12.

  The assembly plate unit 215 is provided with an attachment mechanism for attaching the first control board unit 201. Specifically, as this mounting mechanism, a bearing bracket 231 extending in the vertical direction is provided in the lower left corner portion when viewed from the back surface of the game board 30, and the bearing bracket 231 has a pair of upper and lower bearing holes 231 a on the same axis. Is formed. In the game board 30, a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, a mounting hole for a ny latch) 232 is provided on the right side of the bearing fitting 231, and a locking claw piece 233 is provided above the bearing fitting 231. It has been.

  An attachment mechanism for attaching the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit 203 is provided on the back surface of the main body frame 12. Specifically, a long bearing fitting 235 is attached to the right end of the main body frame 12. The bearing fitting 235 also functions as a reinforcing member. As shown in FIG. 12, the bearing fitting 235 has a long plate-like fitting main body 236 extending downward from the game board 30, and the second lower portion is set up at two lower portions so as to stand up backward from the fitting main body 236. Bearing portions 237 for the control board unit 202 are formed, and bearing portions 238 for the back pack unit 203 are formed at two upper portions. Coaxial bearing holes are formed in the bearing portions 237 and 238, respectively. Note that the bearing portion 237 for the second control board unit 202 and the bearing portion 238 for the back pack unit 203 may be configured by individual bearing fittings. In addition, as a mounting mechanism for the second control board unit 202, the main body frame 12 has a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, mounting holes for the ny latch) 239 at the left end below the game board 30 installation area. Is provided. In addition, as a mounting mechanism for the back pack unit 203, the main body frame 12 is provided with a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, mounting holes for a ny latch) 240 at the left end of the game board 30 installation area. . Rotating fixtures 241, 242 for sandwiching and supporting the back pack unit 203 between the game board 30 at positions on the upper left, upper right and lower right of the game board 30 in the main body frame 12. 243 is provided. Since the back pack unit 203 stores a large amount of game balls in its upper part, the fixtures 241 and 242 for supporting the upper part of the back pack unit 203 should have a particularly strong strength. Desirably, a rotating fixture is used in the present embodiment.

  As described above, a long bearing fitting 235 is provided on the left and right side portions (right side in FIG. 9) of the main body frame 12, while the left and right other side portions (left side in FIG. 9) of the main body frame 12 are locked. A device is provided. The locking device includes a base frame 247 that extends in the vertical direction and is fixed to the main body frame 12, and a long interlocking rod 248 that is assembled to the base frame 247 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The cylinder lock 91 is integrated in the lower part of the cylinder. The interlocking rod 248 moves in either the up or down direction by operating the cylinder lock 91. The interlocking bar 248 is provided with a pair of upper and lower bar brackets 249 having a hook shape. When the main body frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the bar bracket 249 is attached to the support bracket ( (Not shown) and locked by a locking device. In this case, when the interlocking rod 248 moves upward by the operation of the cylinder lock 91, the locking of the main body frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released. On the contrary, when the interlocking rod 248 moves downward by the operation of the cylinder lock 91, the locking of the front door frame 13 with respect to the main body frame 12 is released.

  In the above-described configuration in which the bearing bracket 235 and the locking device (base frame 247, interlocking rod 248, etc.) are distributed to the left and right sides of the main body frame 12, the bearing bracket 235 and the locking device (base frame 247, interlocking rod 248, etc.) are arranged. The game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to have a width that leaves an area for placing a). As described above, the game area is also expanded by this.

  In the lower right portion of the game board 30 on the back surface of the main body frame 12, a game ball distribution unit 245 for distributing game balls paid out from a payout mechanism described later to any of the upper plate 23, the lower plate 16 and the discharge passage 218 is provided. It has been. The game ball distribution unit 245 has a left opening 245a that communicates with the upper plate 23 through the first discharge port 66, and a central opening 245b that communicates with the lower plate 16 through the second discharge port 67, and the right opening. Each passage is formed so that the portion 245c communicates with the discharge passage 218. The game ball distribution unit 245 is firmly attached to the main body frame 12 with screws or the like. Therefore, the floating at the installation site of the game ball distributing unit 245 is prevented, and an illegal act caused by entering a wire, a film, or the like from the gap can be prevented. Note that a synthetic resin speaker box 246 is attached to the lower end portion of the main body frame 12 to surround the back of the speaker 20 installed on the back side of the back wall panel 17, and the speaker box 246 transmits the speaker sound to the rear. The sound quality in the low frequency range is improved by functioning so as not to miss.

  Next, the configuration of the first control board unit 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front view of the first control board unit 201, FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the unit 201, FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 201, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 201 viewed from the back. .

  The first control board unit 201 has a mounting base 251 having a substantially L shape, and the main control device 271 and the sound lamp control device 272 are mounted on the mounting base 251. The main control device 271 includes a CPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port for communicating with various devices, and a random number used in various lotteries. A main substrate including a generator, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. is provided, and the main substrate is accommodated in a substrate box 273 as an encapsulating means made of a transparent resin material or the like. Configured. The substrate box 273 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing unit 274 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 273 is sealed.

  As long as the sealing unit 274 is configured to connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened, any configuration can be applied. Here, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, five sealing members are connected. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened by inserting a locking claw into the long hole of the sealing member. Sealing processing by the sealing unit 274 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been performed. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one sealing member among the five sealing members constituting the sealing unit 274. When the substrate box 273 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main substrate or when the main substrate is inspected, the connection between the sealing member into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing member is disconnected. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If the history of opening the substrate box 273 is left in the substrate box 273, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 273.

  The voice lamp control device 272 includes a CPU that controls voice and lamp display in accordance with instructions from the display control device 214, and a voice lamp control board including other ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. Is accommodated in a substrate box 275 made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power relay board 276 is mounted on the sound lamp control device 272, and the power of the power supply device 313 is supplied to the display control device 214 and the sound lamp control device 272 via the power relay board 276. .

  The mounting base 251 is made of a synthetic resin such as a polycarbonate resin, and is colored opaque, for example, green or blue. However, the mounting base 251 may be colorless and transparent or translucent. Two flat substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 are formed on the surface of the mounting base 251. These substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 extend in a direction orthogonal to the length and breadth and are formed with a step in the front-rear direction. Standing portions 254 erected from the substrate mounting surface 252 are integrally formed on the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion of the substrate mounting surface 252, respectively. The main control device 271 is disposed on the horizontally long substrate mounting surface 252 and the sound lamp control device 272 is disposed on the vertically long substrate mounting surface 253. At this time, the upper and lower sides of main controller 271 are supported by upright portions 254. The sound lamp control device 172 is fixed to the board mounting surface 253 with screws or the like at a plurality of locations.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the substrate mounting surface 252 is formed with horizontally elongated through holes 256 at two places on the left and right. On the other hand, the substrate box 273 of the main control device 271 is provided with rotationally operable fixtures 277 at two places on the left and right sides of the back surface thereof. When the main controller 271 is mounted on the board mounting surface 252, the main controller 271 is placed so that the fixing tool 277 is inserted into the through hole 256 of the board mounting surface 252, and the fixing tool 277 is placed in this state. The main control device 271 is locked by the turning operation. Accordingly, since the main control device 271 cannot be removed unless the lock 277 is unlocked from the back side of the first control board unit 201, a deterrent effect such as board removal can be obtained.

  In addition, in the mount 251, a shielding part 257 for shielding an opening leading to the back space of the substrate mounting surface 252 is provided below the main substrate mounting surface 252. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a hand or the like from being inserted into the back surface of the mounting base 251 from below the substrate mounting surface 252 so that the locked state of the fixture 277 cannot be illegally released. Further, when the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the upper portion of the unit 201 is covered with the back pack unit 203, so that it is also prevented that a hand or the like is inserted into the back surface of the mounting base 251. The locked state of the fixture 277 cannot be illegally released.

  As described above, the first control board unit 201 cannot be removed unless the back pack unit 203 is opened at a predetermined angle or larger, or the unit 203 is not removed. The back pack unit 203 cannot be opened unless the main body frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 by key operation. That is, if the main body frame 12 cannot be opened, the first control board unit 201 cannot be rotated or removed as a result, and the main controller 271 cannot be removed. Therefore, unauthorized replacement or theft of the main controller 271 can be effectively prevented.

  The main control device 271 is arranged on the near side when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the sound lamp control device 272 is arranged on the back side. In this case, since the substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 are formed with steps in the front-rear direction, the control devices 271 and 272 are mounted in a state where the main controller 271 and the sound lamp controller 272 are mounted on the substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253. Are arranged with part of them stacked one after the other. That is, as can be seen in FIG. 14 and the like, the main controller 271 is arranged in a state in which a part thereof (about 1/3 in the present embodiment) is floated. Therefore, it is possible to extend the sound lamp control device 272 to a region overlapping with the main control device 271, and, from another viewpoint, it is possible to extend the main control device 271 to a region overlapping with the sound lamp control device 272. Even within the limited size of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to satisfactorily cope with the increase in size of the control boards 271 and 272, and the control devices 271 and 272 can be installed efficiently. Further, in a state where the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the game board 30, a space is secured behind the board mounting surface 252, and the variable winning device 32 and its electric wiring can be installed without difficulty. Note that lattice-like ribs 258 are provided on the back surface of the substrate mounting surface 252 to enhance the support strength of the main controller 271.

  A pair of upper and lower retaining pins 261 are provided on the left end surface of the mounting base 251, and the first control board unit 201 is rotated with respect to the game board 30 by attaching the retaining pins 261 to the bearing fitting 231. Cantilevered so that it can move. A pair of upper and lower nai latches 262 are provided at the right end of the mounting base 251 as fasteners to be fitted into the fastening holes 232. A long hole 263 in which the locking claw piece 233 is locked is provided at the upper end portion of the mounting base 251. Therefore, the first control board unit 201 is fixed to the game board 30 by fitting the nai latch 262 into the fastening hole 232 and locking the locking claw piece 233 in the long hole 263. It should be noted that the bearing fitting 231 and the latch pin 261 are in the support shaft portion M1, the fastened hole 232 and the ny latch 262 are in the fastening portion M2, and the locking claw piece 233 and the long hole 263 are in the locking claw portion M3. Each corresponds.

  Next, the configuration of the second control board unit 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the second control board unit 202, FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the unit 202, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 202.

  The second control board unit 202 has a horizontally long mounting base 301 on which a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313 and a card unit connection board 314 are mounted. The payout control device 311 and the launch control device 312 are provided with a control board including a central control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, various ports, and the like. The payout control board of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The launch motor 229 is controlled by the launch control board of the launch controller 312 in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player. In addition, a predetermined power supply voltage required by various control devices or the like is generated and output by the power supply board of the power supply device 313. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 on the front surface of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown). It is. Note that the card unit connection board 314 is not necessary in a cash machine in which game balls are rented directly from the ball lending device or the like to the upper plate without using a card unit.

  The payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection substrate 314 are respectively configured to be accommodated in substrate boxes 315, 316, 317, and 318 made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, as with the main control device 271, the substrate box 315 constituting the enclosing means includes a box base and a box cover, and these are connected so as not to be opened by a sealing unit 319 as a sealing means, As a result, the substrate box 315 is sealed. The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of a payout motor, which will be described later, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse so that the ball clogging is eliminated (return to the normal state). It has become. The power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure, and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and held. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323, the RAM data is initialized. It is like that.

  The mounting base 301 is made of, for example, a colorless and transparent resin molded product, and a flat board mounting surface 302 is provided on the surface thereof. On the board mounting surface 302, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are mounted side by side and fixed with screws or the like. A substantially flat pedestal plate 303 is placed on the substrate box 317 of the power supply device 313, and a payout control device 311 is mounted on the pedestal plate 303 and fixed with screws or the like. Since the pedestal plate 303 is interposed between the payout control device 311 and the power supply device 313, for example, in order to install a metal plate for noise removal, the metal plate or the like may be attached to the pedestal plate 303, and noise countermeasures are simple. Can be realized.

  The mounting base 301 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins 305 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit is inserted into the bearing portion 237 from above. 202 is cantilevered so as to be rotatable with respect to the main body frame 12. A pair of upper and lower nail latches 306 are provided as fasteners at the left end of the mounting base 301, and the second control board unit 202 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by fitting the nail latch 306 into the tightened hole 239. The bearing portion 237 and the latch pin 305 correspond to the support shaft portion M4, and the fastened hole 239 and the ny latch 306 correspond to the fastening portion M5, respectively.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 is a front view of the back pack unit 203, and FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit 203. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail.

  The back pack unit 203 is configured by integrating a back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, a synthetic resin such as ABS resin, and includes a substantially flat base portion 353 and a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 35. However, in this embodiment, the above-described sound lamp control device 272 is also enclosed. A large number of ventilation holes 354 a are provided on the back surface of the protective cover portion 354. The vent holes 354a are each formed in a long hole shape, and are provided so that the respective vent holes 354a are adjacent to each other at relatively close positions. Therefore, the back surface of the back pack 351 can be easily opened by cutting the resin portion between the adjacent vent holes 354a. That is, a predetermined test or the like can be easily performed by cutting the resin portion between the vent holes 354a and exposing the display control device 214 and the like inside thereof.

  On the base portion 353 of the back pack 351, a payout mechanism portion 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 351, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows (two rows) of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. A case rail 357 is connected. The payout device 358 is provided in the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and the payout motor 358a is driven by the control of the payout control device 311 so that a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 23 and the like through the payout passage 359 and the like. Although not shown in the figure, a tank ball absence sensor that detects the presence or absence of a game ball supplied from the tank 355 or the tank rail 356 is provided upstream of the case rail 357. The payout device 358 is provided with a payout rotation sensor that detects the rotation of the payout motor 358a and a payout count switch that counts the number of game balls to be paid out.

  A vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356 is attached to the tank rail 356. Vibrator 360 is unitized by a vibrator motor and a synthetic resin case that accommodates the vibrator motor, and is attached to tank rail 356 by two legs 360a. Therefore, if a clogged ball occurs near the tank rail 356, the clogged ball is eliminated by driving the vibrator 360.

  The structure of the tank rail 356 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 22, the tank rail 356 has a rail body 361 having a long bowl shape opened upward. A spherical ball receiving portion 362 is formed in the upstream portion of the rail main body 361 so that the game ball dropped from the tank 355 by the ball receiving portion 362 is smoothly taken into the rail main body 361. The rail body 361 is provided with a partition wall 363 extending in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls are divided into two hands by the partition wall 363. The two ball passages partitioned by the partition wall 363 are slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. On the bottom surface of each spherical passage partitioned by the partition wall 363, one or two ridges 364 are provided, and an opening 365 for dropping dust is provided on the side of the ridge 364. Yes. The rail body 361 is provided with a rectifying plate 367 so as to cover the ceiling portion of the downstream half. The rectifying plate 367 has a bow shape so as to limit the height of the ball passage in the tank rail 356 toward the downstream side, and a convex portion 368 extending in the longitudinal direction is formed on the lower surface thereof. Thereby, each game ball flowing in the tank rail 356 finally flows out downstream without being stacked up and down. Therefore, even if a large amount of game balls flow into the tank rail 356, the game balls are prevented from being bitten and the ball clogging in the tank rail 356 is difficult to occur. The rail main body 361 is formed of a black conductive polycarbonate resin to prevent electrification, while the rectifying plate 367 is formed of a transparent polycarbonate resin so that a clogging of a ball can be visually confirmed. The rectifying plate 367 is detachably provided. By removing the rectifying plate 367, maintenance in the tank rail 356 can be easily performed. A manual stopper 369 for preventing the game ball from flowing down is attached to the current plate 367.

  Returning to the description of FIGS. 20 and 21, the payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and takes in the main power from the outside. A power switch board 382 is installed. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  The discharge mechanism 352 from the tank 355 to the discharge passage 359 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin material such as a conductive polycarbonate resin, and is grounded at a part thereof. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the noise by charging of a game ball is suppressed.

  The back pack 351 is provided with a frame external terminal plate 390 on the upper right portion thereof. The frame external terminal plate 390 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 355 or the tank rail 356, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a number of game balls are lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body frame 12 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 13 is opened are provided. . And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The back pack 351 is provided with a substantially rectangular window 391 adjacent to the frame external terminal plate 390. Therefore, in a state where the back pack unit 103 is attached to the main body frame 12, the board external terminal plate 230 on the back surface of the game board 30 is exposed through the window 391, and the board external terminal plate 230 remains attached with the back pack unit 103 attached. Can be operated. As described above, since the board external terminal plate 230 is attached to the collective board unit 215 in an easily removable state, the board external terminal board 230 is connected to the board via the window portion 391 while being connected. The external terminal plate 230 can be taken out. A main body frame opening switch 392 for detecting the open state of the main body frame 12 is provided in the upper right portion of the back pack 351. When the main body frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the metal of the switch 392 is provided. The contact is closed and the closing of the main body frame 12 is detected. When the main body frame 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11, the metal contact is opened and the opening of the main body frame 12 is detected.

  The back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 385 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the latch pins 385 into the bearing portion 238 from above, the back pack unit 203 is mounted. The body frame 12 is cantilevered so as to be rotatable. The back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nai latches 386 as fasteners at the left end portion, and is provided with a locking hole 387 at the upper end portion. The nai latch 386 is fitted into the tightened hole 240 and the locking hole. The back pack unit 203 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by rotating the fixing tool 242 after inserting the fixing tool 242 into 387. Further, the back pack unit 203 is also fixed to the main body frame 12 by the fixtures 241 and 243. The bearing portion 238 and the latch pin 385 correspond to the support shaft portion M6, the fastened hole 240 and the ny latch 386 correspond to the fastening portion M7, and the fixture 242 and the locking hole 387 correspond to the locking portion M8, respectively. To do. Further, the fixture 243 corresponds to the locking portion M9.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main controller 271 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. A RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. In addition to the memory and area for this purpose, a backup area 503a is provided.

  The backup area 503a stores values such as a stack pointer, each register, and I / O when the power is shut down (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The area of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power cut-off based on the information in the backup area 503a when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation). Yes. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29), and restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process as a process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 of the main control device 271 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311 (to be described later), a switch group (not shown), and the like are connected to the input side of the main control device 271. On the other hand, a payout control device 311 and a display control device 214 are connected to the output side of the main control device 271. In addition, an LED switch disposed in the first specific lamp unit 47 and an LED switch disposed in the second specific lamp unit 48 are also connected. That is, the first specific lamp unit 47 and the second specific lamp unit 48 are directly controlled by the main controller 271. The main controller 271 is provided with a regulating element such as a driver so as to have a one-way communication configuration that transmits a control signal to the display controller 214 but does not receive a control signal from the display controller 214. Yes.

  The payout control device 311 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout motor 358a. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 271. The RAM 513 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data.

  The backup area 513a is an area for storing the stack pointer, registers, I / O, and other values when the power is cut off when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Based on the information in the backup area 513a, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is shut off. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt processing, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 271, the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 271, a firing control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch motor 229, and the launch motor 229 is permitted to drive when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the launch control signal is output from the payout control device 311, the player is detecting that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 18, and the launch for stopping the launch. On condition that the stop switch is not operated, the launch motor 229 is driven, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18.

  The display control device 214 controls the symbol variation display and the jackpot display under the jackpot state in the symbol display device 41. The display control device 214 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, two output ports 528 and 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. It has. The input side of the input port 527 is connected to the output side of the main controller 271 and the selection switch 108. The display control device 214 is provided with a regulating element such as a driver so as to have a one-way communication configuration that receives a control signal from the main control device 271 but does not transmit a control signal to the main control device 271 side. A CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and an image controller 526 are connected to the output side of the input port 527, and an output port 528 is connected via a bus line 530. An audio lamp control device 272 is connected to the output side of the output port 528. An output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531, and a symbol display device 41 is connected to the output side of the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 214 performs display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands such as display commands transmitted from the main control device 271 and the operation of the selection switch 108 by the player, and the sound lamp control device 272. A control command is transmitted to. The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data such as background image data corresponding to the display mode, and the work RAM 523 is used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. This is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 and characters displayed at the time of reach production. The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing to display a symbol. It is displayed on the device 41.

  The sound lamp control device 272 controls the speaker 20, the annular illumination unit 102, and the like based on a control command transmitted from the table control device 214, and includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, various ports, and the like.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24 volt power supply supplied from the outside, and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Then, these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 271 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 541 outputs the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, to a normal value for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 receives a switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323, and outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data of the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. It is. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 to the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the data in the respective backup areas 503a and 513a is cleared in the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (j), the symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and sub-patterns composed of shell-shaped symbols. Has been. More specifically, the numbers “1” to “9” are attached to the right side of nine types of character symbols such as octopus to form the main symbol. In this case, the main symbol to which the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is assigned corresponds to the “specific symbol”, and when a big win occurs in the specific symbol, the gaming state shifts to the big hit state. At the same time, after that, it shifts to a high probability state as a specific gaming state. The main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to a “non-specific symbol”, and if a big hit occurs in the non-specific symbol, it will shift to the big hit state, but the big hit state After completion, the normal state is entered without going to the high probability state. The high probability state means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability has increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot state, a so-called probability variation state, and the normal state (low probability state) is a game that is not such a high probability state. State. In the first specific lamp unit 47, red is displayed in the case of a specific jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot state ends, and green is displayed in the case of an unspecified jackpot that shifts to a normal state after the jackpot state ends. The

  Next, the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 25A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging the above-described main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll from right to left with periodicity. Also, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the display screen G is designed to stop and display three symbols for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  In addition, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is formed on any effective line. If the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in the state, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit occurrence. Further, as the previous stage of jackpot, when the same main symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines, reach is performed, and then reach effect is performed. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, each main symbol is described by a number attached to each. Specifically, “1” symbol, “2” symbol, “3” symbol,... “9” symbol, respectively. Is described. In addition, the same main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 when reaching reach is described as a reach symbol, and an effective line where the reach symbol is stopped is described as a reach line.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 271 uses various counter information in the game to make a big hit lottery, set the emission color of the first specific lamp unit 47, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbols are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for the occasional reach lottery, the promotion random number counter C4 used for the promotion lottery at the time of the specific jackpot, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, The variation type counter CS used for the variation pattern selection, and each outlier symbol of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 Each off the symbol counter CU below in upper ... to be used for the constant, CM, it has decided to use the CL.

  Among these, the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, the out symbol counters CU, CM, CL are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 501, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503. The RAM 503 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game ball to the operation port 33 is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the promoted random number counter C4 are stored in time series in accordance with the winning history.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment) and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operating port 33. The number of random number values that are jackpots is set in the normal state and the high probability state, the number of random number values that are jackpots under the normal state is 2, and the value is “337,673”. There are 10 random numbers that are big hits under a high probability state, and the values are “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661”.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 49, and after reaching the maximum value (ie 49), it returns to 0. In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 determines whether or not to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot state ends. For example, C2 = 0 to 24 is a high probability state after the jackpot state ends. It corresponds to the special jackpot that shifts to C2, and C2 = 25 to 49 corresponds to the non-specific jackpot that shifts to the normal state after the jackpot state ends. That is, half of the jackpot becomes a specific jackpot, and a transition to the high probability state occurs in half after the jackpot state ends. As will be described in detail later, the jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be able to determine a combination of jackpot symbols to be displayed in a stopped state and an effective line to stop display the combination of jackpot symbols. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the reach random number counter C3 causes a jackpot symbol (specifically, the same main symbol as the reach symbol) that can be a big hit in the game times of the last stop symbol sequence (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol sequence Z2). Is shifted by one forward and backward from the reach line, and the top symbol row is Z1 and the bottom symbol row is reached. The jackpot symbol of the final stop symbol row is stopped before and after the reach line. It is assumed that the same main symbol in the symbol row Z3 does not stop on the active line and does not reach and “lots out” are selected. In other words, in the present embodiment, whether or not to perform outreach is determined by the reach random number counter C3. For example, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear outreach, and C3 = 2 to 21 other than front / rear out. This corresponds to reach, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to complete detachment. Note that the reach lottery may be set individually according to the game state, the number of activated balls at the start of change, and the like. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.

  The promoted random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 104, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 104). Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the case of a specific jackpot, a promotion effect is performed in which a combination of non-specific symbols instead of a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line, and a special jackpot is notified under the jackpot state. There is a case. The promotion random number counter C4 determines whether or not to perform this promotion effect. For example, if C4 = 0-8, the promotion effect is performed, and if C4 = 9-104, the promotion effect is not performed. The promoted random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example. The fluctuation type counter CS determines a reach type such as normal reach and super reach, and other rough symbol change modes. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of symbol variation.

  The upper, middle, and lower off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL display a stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 when the big hit lottery is lost. The number of counter values is the same as the number of symbols variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. That is, 18 (0 to 17) counter values are prepared for the up / down symbol counter CU and the down / out symbol counter CL, and 20 (0 to 19) counter values are prepared for the middle / out symbol symbol CM. A value is provided. A stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 is determined by the up / down symbol counter CU, and a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined by the middle / off symbol counter CM. A stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3 is determined by the down / off symbol counter CL. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in which the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order is variably displayed so as to scroll. Therefore, if the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 are determined, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 and the right line L3 can be uniquely derived.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each off symbol counter CU, CM, CL is updated at random by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 501. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CU, CM, CL is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and the addition result is the maximum value (18, 20, 18 in this embodiment, respectively). If it exceeds, the current value is determined by subtracting the maximum value. Each outlier symbol counter CU, CM, CL is updated in the normal processing so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CU, CM, CL is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 503, reach other than front / rear out It is stored in either the symbol buffer or the completely off symbol buffer. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the start of symbol variation, one of the buffer values of the front / rear out of reach symbol buffer, the non-front / rear out reach symbol buffer, and the complete out of symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, if importance is attached to irregularity, the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, the promoted random number counter C4, and the variation type counter CS are all different prime numbers, and are set to values that are not synchronized in any case. desirable. Although not shown, the second random number counter 48 is used for lottery of the second specific lamp unit 48. The second random number counter C5 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that increments one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second random number counter C5 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random values to be won is 149, and the value is “5 to 153”.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 271 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is NMI interrupt processing activated by signal input. For convenience of explanation, first, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then main processing will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 271 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 27, in step S101, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 271 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In the subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the promoted random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the promoted random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, 676, 49, 238, 104), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S104, a start winning process (lottery means) associated with winning in the operating port 33 is executed. This starting winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. In step S201, whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening 33 (starting winning) is determined based on the detection information of the operating opening switch 224. If it is determined that the game ball has won the operating port 33, in the subsequent step S202, is the number N of the operation reserved balls of the first specific lamp unit 47 and the symbol display device 41 less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment)? Determine whether or not. The process proceeds to step S203 on condition that there is a winning at the operation port 33 and the number N of activated balls is <4, and the number N of activated balls is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S204, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the promoted random number counter C4 updated in the step S103 are used as the first area in the free storage area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. To store. Then, after the start winning process, the CPU 501 once ends the timer interrupt process.

  When the game ball wins the operating opening 33 (start winning prize), the symbol variation display is started accordingly. However, after the start winning, the symbol starts the variation display and ends. There is a restriction that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) must elapse. Therefore, in the start winning process, when a start winning is confirmed, a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start winning is set after each counter value storing process (step S204). Specifically, since the start winning process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, in order to measure an elapsed time of 5 seconds, a numerical value “2500” is set in the timer, and the timer value is incremented by 1 for each start winning process. Subtract. This timer value is stored and managed in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 together with the values of the respective counters C1 to C4. In setting a symbol variation pattern, which will be described later, the timer value is referred to, and a variation pattern is set according to the remaining time (so that symbol variation is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 271 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 271 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 271 and the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed. To start NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt processing program in FIG. 29 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 271. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main controller 271 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within the predetermined time.

  In the NMI interrupt processing, in step S301, the used register is saved in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503, and in the subsequent step S302, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. Further, in step S303, the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a, and in step S304, a power interruption notification command indicating that the power has been interrupted is transmitted to another control device. In step S305, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. In step S306, RAM access is prohibited. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 29 is started. The contents are the same as described above, except that the power-off notification command is not transmitted in step S1104.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 271. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  In the main process, in step S401, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (audio lamp control device 272, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, Wait processing is performed for about 1 second. In step S402, a payout permission command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In subsequent step S403, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S404, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed, and in subsequent step S405, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power shutdown is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. To do. In step S406, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503, for example. Note that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (steps S414 to S416). Similarly, when the occurrence information of the power shutdown is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (steps S414 to S416). . That is, in step S414, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S415, initialization processing of the RAM 503 is executed. In step S416, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, the power-off occurrence information is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the condition at the time of power recovery Execute the process (process when the power supply is restored). That is, in step S408, the stack pointer before the power shutdown is restored, and in step S409, the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is cleared. In step S410, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S411, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. In steps S412 and S413, the interruption permission / non-permission is returned to the state before the power interruption, and then the address before the power interruption is returned.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S501 to S507 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S509 and S510 is executed with the remaining time.

  In normal processing, in step S501, output data such as a command updated in the previous processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. When the symbol display is performed by the symbol display device 41, display commands such as a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, and a variation end command are transmitted to the display control device 214. Further, a state transition command is transmitted to the display control device 214 when the state of the jackpot state is shifted, and an opening command or a closing command is transmitted when the variable winning device 32 is opened or closed.

  Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In the subsequent step S503, updating of each outlier symbol counter CU, CM, CL of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is executed.

  The update process of each outlier symbol counter CU, CM, CL will be described. As shown in FIG. 32, in step S601, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the outlier symbol counter CU in the upper symbol row Z1, and in step S602, It is determined whether or not it is time to update the symbol symbol counter CM out of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is time to update the upper symbol row Z1 (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S603, and the outlier symbol counter CU of the upper symbol row Z1 is updated. If the update timing of the middle symbol row Z2 (YES in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604, and the outlier symbol counter CM of the middle symbol row Z2 is updated. Further, if the update timing of the lower symbol row Z3 (NO in both steps S601 and S602), the process proceeds to step S605, and the outlier symbol counter CL of the lower symbol row Z3 is updated. In the update of the off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL in steps S603 to S605, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, only the maximum value is obtained. Subtraction is performed, and the result of the calculation is taken as the current value of the symbol counters CU, CM, CL. According to the update process of the off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL, the off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 are one by one in one normal process. It is updated in order, and the update timing of each outlier symbol counter CU, CM, CL does not overlap. As a result, every time the normal process is executed three times, the set symbol counters CU, CM, and CL are updated for one set.

  Thereafter, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the combination of the values of the updated outlier symbol counters CU, CM, and CL is a combination for stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol combination on any one of the effective lines. If the combination is a combination that causes the combination to be stopped, this processing is terminated. If the combination of jackpot symbols is not a stop combination, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the combination of reach symbols is stopped on any active line, and the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed. If it is, in step S608, it is determined whether or not it is a combination that stops and displays the combination of out-of-front and back reach. If the combination of front and rear outreach reach is to be stopped, the process proceeds to step S609, and the combination of the values of the outlier symbol counters CU, CM, and CL at that time is stored in the front and rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 503. If the reach combination other than front / rear out is a combination that stops and displays, the process proceeds to step S610, and the combination of the values of the out-of-front counter CU, CM, CL at that time is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out of RAM 503. When the combination of the values of the off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL is not a combination that causes the combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and is not a combination that causes the combination of reach symbols to be stopped and displayed (when both steps S606 and S607 are NO), This corresponds to the combination of the values of the off symbol counters CU, CM, CL being a combination for stopping and displaying the off symbol combination. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S611, and the off symbol counters CU, CM at that time are displayed. , CL values are stored in a completely out of symbol buffer of the RAM 503.

  After the update process of the off symbol counters CU, CM, CL, in step S504 in FIG. 31, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read. Thereafter, in step S505, a first specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 is executed. In the first specific lamp unit control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, ON / OFF control of the switch of the LED disposed in the first specific lamp unit 47, and the like are performed. However, details of the first specific lamp unit control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S506, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to a jackpot state or a high probability state by this gaming state transition process.

  In step S507, a second specific lamp unit control process for switching the color displayed on the second specific lamp unit 48 is executed. Briefly, in the second specific lamp unit control process, the value of the second random number counter C5 is acquired and displayed on the second specific lamp unit 48 on the condition that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34. Start the color switching process. Then, a lottery of the second specific lamp unit 48 is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C5. If it is a win, red is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time, and the electric accessory attached to the operation port 33 is predetermined. Free time. Although the explanation is omitted, the second random number counter C5 is also updated by the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 27, like the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the promoted random number counter C4. ing.

  Thereafter, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S509 and S510). That is, in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In step S510, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  Next, the first specific lamp unit control process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the first specific lamp unit control process, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a jackpot state, and if it is a jackpot state, this process is terminated as it is. If it is not a big hit state, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the first specific lamp unit 47 is being switched and displayed. If the first specific lamp unit 47 is not in the switching display, the process proceeds to step S703, and it is determined whether or not the number N of the operation reserved balls of the first specific lamp unit 47 and the symbol display device 41 is greater than zero. And when the number N of operation reservation balls is 0, this processing is ended as it is.

  If the number of operation hold balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, 1 is subtracted from the number N of active suspension balls. In step S705, processing for shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The reserved first area → the execution area, the reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  In step S706, a switching start process for starting switching of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 is executed. Specifically, the timer for judging the switching timing of the displayed color is reset, and further, all the switches of the LEDs arranged in the first specific lamp unit 47 are turned off, and then the red light source switch is turned on. Turn on control. Accordingly, red is displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47. By the way, if it is not after the end of the big hit state, the blue light source switch is turned on before the switching display starts, and after the end of the big hit state, the red light source or the green light source is turned on. .

  After that, in step S707, a variation start process for starting symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41 is executed. Here, the fluctuation start process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. More specifically, it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot if it is any one of “337, 673” under the normal state, and “67, 131, 199, 269, under the high probability state”. 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661 "is determined to be a big hit.

  If it is determined that it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is 24 or less. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 24 or less, it means that it is a specific jackpot. Therefore, in step S803, a red display flag is set so that the final display color of the first specific lamp unit 47 is red, and in step S804, the specific flag is set. In step S805, a specific command transmitted to the display control device 214 is set, indicating that a specific jackpot will occur.

  In subsequent step S806, a jackpot symbol determination process is performed for determining a combination of jackpot symbols to be stopped and displayed when the symbol variation display is terminated.

  The jackpot symbol determination process will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. 35. In step S901, it is determined whether or not the value of the promoted random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is 8 or less. If it is determined that the value of the promoted random number counter C4 is not 8 or less, it means that the promotion lottery was not won. In such a case, in step S902, the jackpot symbol table is referred to, and the combination of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is obtained.

  Here, the jackpot symbol table is a table in which the correspondence between the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the combination of jackpot symbols is defined as shown in FIG. More specifically, it is a table in which the correspondence relationship between the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed on the left line L1 when the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed.

  Since there are two “4” symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment, there are ten combinations including the two “4” symbol combinations. Since five effective lines are set, there are 50 stop patterns for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are jackpots. Therefore, in the jackpot symbol table, each value of 0 to 49 of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with 50 kinds of stop patterns, and each symbol row Z1 when the jackpot occurrence is generated from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 The stop symbol of Z3 can be derived. More specifically, each value of 0-24 of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with each stop pattern of a combination of odd symbols (specific symbols) in which a specific jackpot occurs, and each value of 25-49 is a non-specific jackpot It is associated with each stop pattern of a combination of even-numbered symbols (non-specific symbols) to be generated. For example, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 2, when the symbol variation display is finished, the combination of “5” symbols is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 27. When the symbol variation display ends, the combination of symbols “6” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. More specifically, when the combination of the “5” symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the sub symbol arranged between the “5” symbol and the “6” symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is the left line L1. In the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the sub symbol arranged between the “4” symbol and the “5” symbol is stopped and displayed on the left line L1. Therefore, in the area corresponding to C2 = 2 in the jackpot symbol table, the symbol number values “11H, 09H, 09H” indicating the symbols are stored. The “4a” symbol refers to the “4” symbol placed between the “9” symbol and the “1” symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, and the “3” symbol and the “5” symbol. For the sake of easy distinction from the “4” symbol placed between them, “4a” is described for convenience.

  In the subsequent step S903, stop symbol commands indicating symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 based on the reference result of the jackpot symbol table are set for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S901 that the value of the promoted random number counter C4 is 8 or less, it means that the promotion lottery has been won. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S904, and a promotion command transmitted to the display control device 214 is set, indicating that the promotion lottery has been won. Thereafter, in step S905, the promotion symbol table is referred to obtain a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area.

  Here, the promoted symbol table is a table in which the correspondence between the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the combination of jackpot symbols is defined as shown in FIG. 36 (b). More specifically, it is a table in which the correspondence relationship between the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed on the left line L1 when the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. However, unlike the jackpot symbol table, in the promoted symbol table, only the correspondence between each value of 0-24 of the jackpot type counter C2, that is, each value when a specific jackpot occurs and the combination of the jackpot symbol is determined. . Further, in the promoted symbol table, each value of 0 to 24 of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with each stop pattern of the combination of even symbols that causes non-specific jackpot. That is, when the promotion lottery is won, the combination of the non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed despite the specific jackpot. In other words, when the promotion lottery is won, it can be said that the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed so that the combination of the non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed instead of the combination of the specific symbols. As will be described in detail later, when the promotion lottery is won, it is informed that it is a specific jackpot under the jackpot condition. By associating each value of 0 to 24 of the jackpot type counter C2 with each stop pattern of non-specific symbol combinations, that is, 25 stop patterns that become non-specific jackpots, the combination of non-specific symbols is stopped on any valid line Even in this case, it is possible to leave room for a specific jackpot, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the transition to the high probability state.

  In the subsequent step S903, stop symbol commands indicating symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 based on the reference result of the promoted symbol table are set for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 34, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is not 24 or less in step S802, it means that the jackpot is a non-specific jackpot. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S807, and a green display flag is set so that the final display color of the first specific lamp unit 47 is green. In step S808, it is indicated that a non-specific big hit will occur and the display control device 214 is notified. Set non-specific commands to be sent. Thereafter, in step S809, the jackpot symbol table corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is obtained by referring to the jackpot symbol table described above. In step S810, a stop symbol command indicating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 is set for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 based on the reference result of the jackpot symbol table.

  After setting the stop symbol command in step S806 or step S810, in step S811, the jackpot variation pattern until the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 is confirmed, and a rough reach type such as normal reach or super reach is determined based on the value. Note that the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS and the variation pattern is defined in advance by a table (not shown).

  In step S812, the fluctuation display time is derived based on the decided fluctuation pattern and the stopped symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Specifically, it is based on a table (not shown) in which the relationship between the reach type such as normal reach, super reach, etc., and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, and the variable display time is defined. To derive the variable display time. Thereafter, in step S813, a jackpot variation pattern command indicating a jackpot variation pattern and a variation display time is set, and in subsequent step S814, a timer for measuring the switching display time of the first specific lamp unit 47 is derived in step S812. The changed display time is set, and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S801 that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S815, a blue display flag is set so that the final display color of the first specific lamp unit 47 is blue, and in step S816, it is indicated that it is out of place. A release command transmitted to the display control device 214 is set. Thereafter, in step S817, a variation pattern determining process for determining a variation pattern in the case of deviation is executed, and the present process is terminated.

  The variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. In the case of occurrence, it is further determined in step S1002 whether or not it is out-of-front reach based on the value of the reach random number counter C3. In the present embodiment, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is any one of 0 to 238, of which “0, 1” corresponds to the out-of-front reach and “2-21” corresponds to the reach other than the back-and-forth out- “22 to 238” corresponds to no reach (complete detachment).

  If the front / rear out of reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1003, and the values of the up / down / out / rear out symbol counters CU, CM, and CL stored in the front / rear out of reach design buffer of the RAM 503 are referred to, and a reach other than front / rear out is generated. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the values of the upper, middle, and lower off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear deviation of the RAM 503 are referred to.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not each value of the out symbol counter CU in the upper symbol row Z1 and the out symbol counter CL in the lower symbol row Z3 is a value that causes reach by the specific symbol, and the reach by the specific symbol occurs. In step S1006, it is further determined whether or not the value of the promoted random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is 8 or less. If the value of the promoted random number counter C4 is 8 or less, it means that the promotion lottery has been won although no jackpot is generated. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S1007, and the reach symbol table is referred to.

  Here, the reach symbol table is a table in which a correspondence relationship between a specific symbol that is a reach symbol and a reach line that causes reach, and a non-specific symbol that is a reach symbol and a reach line that causes reach is defined. More specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 that stop at the left line L1 when a reach occurs due to a specific symbol, and the top that stops at the left line L1 when a reach occurs due to a non-specific symbol. This is a table in which the correspondence relationship between the symbol row Z1 and the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is defined. Although illustration is omitted, in the reach symbol table, each result of C2 = 0 to 24 of the jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 36 is associated with each result of C2 = 0 to 24 of the promoted symbol table. For example, when the reach is generated by the “3” symbol in the left line L1, the values of the out symbol counter CU in the upper symbol row Z1 and the out symbol counter CL in the lower symbol row Z3 are reached by the “2” symbol in the left line L1. When it occurs, it is associated with the value of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (refer to each column of C2 = 6 in FIG. 36).

  In step S1008, stop symbol commands indicating symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 are set for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 based on the reference result of the reach symbol table. However, for the stop symbol command of the middle symbol row Z2 indicating the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the out symbol stored in the corresponding reach symbol buffer of the RAM 503 (rear symbol symbol buffer other than front / rear away symbol buffer). It is set based on the value of the counter CM. That is, when the promotion lottery is won in the situation where the detachment reach is performed, only the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is changed, and the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is not changed. In other words, it can be said that when the promotion lottery is won in a situation where the outreach with the specific symbol is performed, the reach symbol is changed to the non-specific symbol. At this time, if a combination of jackpot symbols is formed when the stop symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are changed based on the reference result of the reach symbol table, the respective symbols (reach symbols) are changed. Without stopping, a stop symbol command indicating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 based on the values of the upper, middle, and lower out symbol counters CU, CM, and CL stored in the corresponding reach symbol buffer of the RAM 503. It sets about each symbol row Z1-Z3, respectively. For example, the values of the up, middle, and lower off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL stored in the reach symbol buffer are “3” symbol, “2” symbol, “3” symbol, and left line in order from the upper symbol column Z1. If the symbol is a value indicating that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed on L1, if the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 is changed to “2” symbol based on the reach symbol table, The “2” symbol, the “2” symbol, and the combination of the “2” symbol and the non-specific symbol are stopped and displayed. Therefore, in such a case, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 based on the values of the upper, middle, and lower off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL stored in the corresponding reach symbol buffer of the RAM 503. Is set for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In other words, if the combination of jackpot symbols is formed when the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is changed based on the reference result of the reach symbol table, the change of the reach symbol is prohibited. It can also be said.

  If it is determined in step S1005 that the reach symbol is not a specific symbol, or if it is determined in step S1006 that the value of the promoted random number counter C4 is not 8 or less, the process proceeds to step S1009, and the corresponding reach symbol buffer in the RAM 503 is stored. Based on the stored values of the upper, middle and lower off symbol counters CU, CM, and CL, stop symbol commands indicating symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 are set for the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, respectively.

  After setting the stop symbol command for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, in step S1010, the reach variation pattern until the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are stopped is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 is confirmed, and a rough reach type such as normal reach or super reach is determined based on the value. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS and the reach variation pattern is defined in advance by a table (not shown).

  In step S1011, the fluctuation display time is derived based on the determined reach fluctuation pattern and the stopped symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. At this time, similarly to step S812 above, the relationship between the reach type such as normal reach, super reach, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, and the variable display time are defined. The variable display time is derived based on a table (not shown). Thereafter, in step S1012, a reach fluctuation pattern command indicating a reach fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation display time is set. In step S1013, a timer for measuring the switching display time of the first specific lamp unit 47 is derived in step S1011. The variable display time is set, and the process ends.

  If the reach has not occurred (NO in step S1001), the values of the upper, middle, and lower out symbol counters CU, CM, and CL stored in the completely out symbol buffer of RAM 503 are referred to in step S1014. In step S1015, a stop symbol command indicating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 is set for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 based on each referenced value. Thereafter, in step S1016, a complete deviation variation pattern command indicating a complete deviation variation pattern and a variation display time is set. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, in the case of complete detachment, the variable display is sequentially stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 with the passage of a predetermined time. Therefore, in the case of complete deviation, the complete deviation fluctuation pattern command is set without determining the complete deviation fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Thereafter, in step S1013, the variable display time in the case of complete detachment is set in the timer for measuring the switching display time of the first specific lamp unit 47, and this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 33, if step S702 is YES, that is, if the first specific lamp unit 47 is being switched, the process proceeds to step S708, and the switching display time set in the previous variation start process S707 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the switching display time has not elapsed, display color switching processing is executed in step S709. By this display color switching process, the switch of each light source is on / off controlled, and the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 is switched. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed since resetting the timer for determining the switching time in the switching start process S706. Then, after turning off the switch of the light source that is currently turned on, a preset flag is confirmed, a predetermined light source is turned on based on the flag, and a flag is set and erased. This flag is set in two types such as a first flag and a second flag, and the light source to be turned on next is determined according to the states of these two types of flags. For example, when the first flag is 0 and the second flag is 1, the green light source switch is turned on, and the second flag is erased (both flags are in a 0 state). When both flags are 0, the blue light source switch is turned on, and the first flag is set (the first flag is 1 and the second flag is 0). When the first flag is 1 and the second flag is 0, the red light source switch is turned on, the first flag is erased, and the second flag is set (the first flag is 0, The second flag becomes 1). In the switching start process, after the red light source switch is turned on, the first flag is deleted and the second flag is set. As a result, the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 is changed in the order of red, green, and blue, and the switching of the colors in the order is repeated. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the timer for determining the switching time has been reset, this processing is terminated without performing on / off control of the switch of the light source.

  If it is determined in step S708 that the switching display time has elapsed, a switching end process is executed in step S710. This switching end process is a process for turning on the light source of the color to be finally displayed. Specifically, first, the switch of the light source that is currently turned on is turned off. Thereafter, the display flag set in the previous variation start process is confirmed, and the light source switch corresponding to the display flag is turned on. That is, the switch of the red light source is turned on in the case of a specific jackpot, the switch of the green light source is turned on in the case of a non-special jackpot, and the switch of the blue light source is turned on in the case of being off. As a result, the display color corresponding to the jackpot lottery result is finally displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47. Note that the display color set here is maintained until the next switching start process. After performing this switching end process, in S711, a change end command indicating that the switching display time has elapsed is set, and this process ends.

  In addition, the display command set in the first specific lamp unit control process, specifically, a lottery result command such as a specific command, a promotion command, a stop symbol command of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, a variation pattern command, a variation end The command is output to the display control device 214 in the external output process S501 in the normal process of FIG. More specifically, when the symbols are variably displayed, a lottery result command → a promotion command → a variation pattern command → a stop symbol command for the upper symbol row Z1 (also referred to as the upper symbol command) → a stop symbol command for the middle symbol row Z2 (the middle symbol) Command is also output in order of stop symbol command (also referred to as symbol command below) in the following symbol sequence Z3, one at each normal processing (ie, one command every 4 msec), and variable display time The change end command is output at the timing when (switching display time) has elapsed. Further, the display control device 214 determines detailed display contents such as a notice character and a reach character to be displayed at the time of jackpot fluctuation (jackpot reach fluctuation) or outlier reach fluctuation based on these commands, and displays the symbol display device 41. Direct display control. Thereby, the change display of a symbol is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a big hit state. If it is not a jackpot state, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot fluctuation in which the combination of jackpot symbols is finally stopped and displayed has ended. Specifically, the determination is made based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area and the elapse of the switching display time. If the big hit variation has not ended, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the big hit variation has ended, the big hit state start processing shown in steps S1103 to S1105 is performed. In the big hit state start process, 15 is set in a round counter RC provided in the RAM 503 in step S1103. The round counter RC is a counter for counting the number of times the special winning opening is opened. Thereafter, in step S1104, 5000 (that is, 10 seconds) is set in a timer for measuring the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the special winning opening, and in the subsequent step S1105, a state transition command is set and the process is terminated. Here, the state transition command is transmitted to the display control device 214. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 214 recognizes that it has shifted to the jackpot state and starts display control so that the symbol display device 41 displays an opening moving image indicating the transition to the jackpot state. The set timer value is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 msec.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is a big win state in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1106 to perform a big prize opening / closing process for opening or closing the big prize opening.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, it is first determined in step S1201 whether or not the big prize opening is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the excitation state of the special winning opening solenoid. If the big winning opening is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is 0 in step S1202, and whether or not the value of the timer is 0 is determined in step S1203. When the value of the round counter RC is 0 or when the value of the timer is not 0, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not 0 and the value of the timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1204, and the big prize opening solenoid is energized to open the big prize opening. In subsequent step S1205, 0 is set to a winning counter PC for storing the number of game balls won in the big winning opening. Thereafter, in step S1206, 14750 (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the timer, and a release command is set in step S1207, and this process is terminated. As a result, the special winning opening is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds. Here, the release command is transmitted to the display control device 214. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 214 recognizes that the big prize opening has been opened, and displays a video to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 while the big prize opening is opened. Start control.

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the special winning opening is open, the process advances to step S1208 to determine whether or not the timer value is zero. If the value of the timer is not 0, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not a game ball has won a big winning opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a winning detection signal indicating a game ball winning is received from the big winning opening relay board 227. If no winning detection signal has been received, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning detection signal is received, 1 is added to the value of the winning counter PC in step S1210, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is 10 in step S1211. This process ends.

  If the timer value is 0 in step S1208, or if the value of the winning counter PC is 10 in step S1211, it means that the special winning opening closing condition is established. In such a case, in step S1212, the big prize opening solenoid is set in a non-excited state to close the big prize opening. In subsequent step S1213, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter RC, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is 0 in step S1214. If the value of the round counter RC is not 0, 1000 (that is, 2 seconds) is set in the timer in step S1215. If the value of the round counter RC is 0, the timer is set to 5000 (that is, 10 seconds) in step S1216. ) Is set. Thereafter, a close command is set in step S1217, and this process is terminated. Here, the close command is transmitted to the display control device 214. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 214 recognizes that one round has ended, for example, a pre-opening video that teaches the number of rounds for the next time, or an ending video that indicates that the jackpot state has ended. Is started to be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  After the big prize opening / closing process, in step S1107, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is 0, and in step S1108, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0. If at least one of the values of the round counter RC or the timer is not 0, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the values of the round counter RC and the timer are 0, the process advances to step S1109 to perform a jackpot state end process for ending the jackpot state. Therefore, under the big hit state, the consecutive opening of the big winning opening is allowed for the number of times set in the round counter RC (that is, 15 times).

  After the big hit state end process is performed, a state transition process is performed in steps S1110 to S1112. That is, in step S1110, it is determined whether or not a specific flag is set. If the specific flag is set, it means that a specific jackpot has occurred, so the process proceeds to step S1111 and a high-probability state transition process for setting the subsequent gaming state to a high-probability state is performed, and this process is terminated. . Further, when the specific flag is not set, it means that a non-specific big hit has occurred. Therefore, in step S1112, a normal state transition process is performed in which the subsequent game state is set to the normal state, and this process is terminated. .

  Here, the relationship between the color switching mode displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A shows the change display status of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and the display color switching display status of the first specific lamp unit 47. FIG. ) Shows the detailed status of the color switching control displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47. FIG. 40 shows a pattern in which a big jackpot does not occur in the previous game round and a specific jackpot occurs in the current game round, but in other patterns, only the first and last displayed colors are different. The basic switching mode is the same.

  First, at the timing of t0, the main control device 271 starts switching control of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 by performing on / off control of the switch of the LED disposed in the first specific lamp unit 47. At the same time, a display command is output to the display control device 214. Then, the display control device 214 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to start the variable display of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen based on the display command. Thereby, the change display of each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the color switching display displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 are started. Thereafter, the display control device 214 independently controls the display of the symbol display device 41, so that the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped at the timing t1, and the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped at the timing t2. Furthermore, the change display of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped at the timing of t3. During this time, the main control device 271 continues the switching control of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 by turning on / off the switches of the respective light sources of the LEDs arranged in the first specific lamp unit 47. Is going. Specifically, the first specific lamp unit 47 displays each color for a predetermined time in the order of red, green, and blue, and the color displayed in that order is repeatedly switched. Then, at the timing t4 of the switching display time set in the variation start process, the main control device 271 controls to turn off the switch of the green light source of the LED disposed in the first specific lamp unit 47, and further the red light source. By switching on the switch, the process of ending the switching of the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 is performed, and a change end command is transmitted to the display control device 214. Upon receiving this change end command, the display control device 214 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are finally stopped and displayed. As a result, both the symbol variation display on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 and the color switching display displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 are completed at the timing of t4. At the timing t4, a predetermined time has not elapsed since green is displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47. However, since the switching display time has elapsed, the switch of the green light source is not restricted to that. The switch is turned off and the switch of the red light source is turned on. This ON state of the switch of the red light source is continued until the next game start is started, more specifically, until the next switching display is started.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control apparatus 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S1301, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S1302, the process waits until a payout permission command transmitted from main controller 271 is received. When the payout permission command is received, the process advances to step S1303 to permit RAM access, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S1304.

  Thereafter, a data backup process is executed for the RAM 513 in the CPU 511. That is, in step S1305, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed, and in subsequent step S1306, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power shutdown is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. To do. In step S1307, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S1308, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. Note that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If the RAM erase switch 323 has been pressed, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (steps S1315 to S1318). Similarly, when the occurrence information of power shutdown is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 (steps S1315 to S1318). . That is, in step S1315, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S1316, initialization processing of the RAM 513 is executed. In step S1317, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S1318, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to a payout control process described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, the power-off occurrence information is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the condition at the time of power recovery Execute the process (process when the power supply is restored). That is, in step S1309, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S1310, information on occurrence of power-off is cleared. In step S1311, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S1312, the register used is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in steps S1313 and S1314, the interrupt permission / non-permission is returned to the state before power-off, and then the address before power-off is returned.

  Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In FIG. 42, in step S1401, a command from the main controller 271 is acquired, and the total number of prize balls is stored. In step S1402, launch permission is set for launch control apparatus 312. In step S1403, the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1404, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 16. That is, when the lower pan 16 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan is full, , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S1405, setting of a tank ball absence state or a tank ball absence release state is executed according to a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S1406, the presence / absence of a state to be notified is determined. If there is a state to be notified, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 is notified.

  In steps S1407 to S1409, prize ball payout processing is executed. In this case, if the prize ball is not payable and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1401 is not 0 (both NO in steps S1407 and S1408), the process proceeds to step S1409, and a prize to be described later shown in FIG. Start the ball control process. If the prize ball is not paid out or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1407 and S1408), the process proceeds to a lending ball payout process in steps S1410 to S1412.

  In the lending ball payout process, if the lending ball is not ready to be dispensed and if a lending ball payout request is received from the card unit (NO in step S1410, YES in S1411), the process proceeds to step S1412 and is shown in FIG. The lending ball control process described later is started. If the lending ball cannot be dispensed or if a lending ball dispensing request has not been received (YES in step S1410 or NO in S1411), the subsequent ball removal process is executed.

  In step S1413, the state return switch 321 is checked to check that the ball removal is not disabled and that the ball removal operation is not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the subsequent step S1414, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the payout control process.

  Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 43, in step S1501, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the prize ball payout. In the subsequent step S1502, whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1503 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process in FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process advances to step S1504 to determine whether or not the game ball is normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1505 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process of FIG.

  If the game ball count is normal, the process advances to step S1506 to determine whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and the payout has been completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1507, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  Also, in the lending ball control process shown in FIG. 44, in step S1601, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute lending ball payout. In the subsequent step S1602, it is determined from the detection result of the dispensing rotation sensor whether the rotation of the dispensing motor 358a is normal. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1603 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process in FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process advances to step S1604 to determine whether or not the game ball is normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1605 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process of FIG.

  Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1606, where it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached a predetermined number of rented balls (25) and the payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process for the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1607, and then the process returns to the payout control process in FIG.

  Next, of the display control of the symbol display device 41 executed by the CPU 521 in the display control device 214, the variation display processing related to the symbol variation display and the jackpot display processing under the jackpot state will be described.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of display modes in which the background image displayed on the display screen, the notice character or reach character displayed in the case of jackpot fluctuation (jackpot reach fluctuation) or outlier reach fluctuation, etc. The player can change the display mode by operating the selection switch 108 provided on the front side of the bulging portion 22.

  Therefore, prior to the description of the variable display process, the display mode change process performed by the display control device 214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the display mode changing process, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a big hit state, and in step S1702, it is determined whether or not the symbol is being variably displayed. If the current gaming state is not a big hit state and the symbols are not variably displayed (when both step S1701 and step S1702 are NO), the process proceeds to step S1703 to determine whether or not the selection switch 108 has been operated. . If the selection switch 108 has not been operated, the present process is terminated. If the selection switch 108 has been operated, the current display mode is confirmed in step S1704, and the mode flag is set in step S1705. I do. Specifically, the work RAM 523 of the display control device 214 is provided with an area for setting a mode flag corresponding to each of the three display modes. When the first display mode flag is set, the first display mode flag is cleared and the second display mode flag is set. When the second display mode flag is set, the second display mode flag is set. The display mode flag is cleared and the third display mode flag is set. When the third display mode flag is set, the third display mode flag is cleared and the first display mode flag is set. That is, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed in the order of the first display mode → the second display mode → the third mode every time the selection switch 108 is operated. Thereafter, in step S1706, processing such as displaying a background image corresponding to the set mode flag on the display screen is performed, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a jackpot state or when the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (when either of steps S1701 and S1702 is YES), the display mode is not confirmed without confirming the operation of the selection switch 108. This process ends without changing the value. That is, the operation of the selection switch 108 is invalidated under these circumstances. Note that the selection switch 108 has a built-in lamp (not shown), and the display control device 214 turns off the lamp when the big hit state or symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol is not in a variable display state instead of the big hit state. Transmits a control command for lighting the lamp to the sound lamp control device 272. The sound lamp control device 272 performs drive control (lighting control) of a lamp built in the selection switch 108 in accordance with a control command from the display control device 214.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 23, the selection switch 108 is connected only to the input port 527 of the display control device 214 and is not connected to the input port 505 of the main control device 271. Further, the output ports 528 and 529 of the display control device 214 are not connected to the input side of the main control device 271. That is, each display mode is managed independently by the display control device 214, and the main control device 271 is not involved in the display mode management. In this way, the display control device 214 independently manages each display mode, thereby making it possible to diversify display effects on the symbol display device 41 without increasing the processing load of the main control device 271. Can be suppressed.

  Next, a symbol variation display process performed based on reception of a display command transmitted from the main controller 271 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether a lottery result command or a promotion command has been received. If any command is received, a flag corresponding to the work RAM 523 is set in step S1802, and the process ends. . That is, when a specific command is received, the specific flag is set in the work RAM 523, when a non-specific command is received, the non-specific flag is set in the work RAM 523, and when a disconnect command is received, the disconnect flag is set to the work RAM 523. When the promotion command is received in the RAM 523, the promotion flag is set in the work RAM 523. That is, the display control device 214 recognizes whether or not the jackpot has been generated and the jackpot type based on the reception of the lottery result command, and recognizes that the promotion lottery on the main control device 271 side has been won based on the reception of the promotion command.

  If it is determined that neither the lottery result command nor the promotion command has been received, the process advances to step S1803 to determine whether a variation pattern command has been received. When the variation pattern command is received, the received content is stored in the work RAM 523 and the process proceeds to step S1804, and display control of the symbol display device 41 is started so that each symbol row Z1 to Z3 starts high-speed variation. Thereafter, in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a complete deviation fluctuation. If the fluctuation pattern is a perfect deviation fluctuation, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when the fluctuation is not complete deviation, it means that the received command is a jackpot fluctuation pattern command or a reach fluctuation pattern command, and means that some reach fluctuation is performed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S1806, and the symbol position of the middle symbol row Z2 is adjusted so that the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2 passes the middle line L2 at the timing of reach occurrence (that is, the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z2). Then, this process ends. By performing such processing, the position of the “1” symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 at the time of reach occurrence can be made the same regardless of any reach fluctuation. Therefore, even if the fluctuation display time until the fluctuation display is ended can be changed by the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, even if the reach variation is the same, it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1803 that a variation pattern command has not been received, it is determined in step S1807 whether a stop symbol command has been received. When the stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol of the left line L1 indicated by the stop symbol command is set in the stop symbol storage area provided in the work RAM 523 in step S1808. In the following step S1809, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol command received this time is a lower symbol command. As described above, main controller 271 transmits a stop symbol command one by one for each normal process in the order of upper symbol command → middle symbol command → lower symbol command. Therefore, when the stop symbol command received this time is not the lower symbol command, it means that the stop symbol commands of all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 have not been received, and thus this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the stop symbol command received this time is a symbol command below, this means that the stop symbol commands for all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 have been received, so the symbol position adjustment processing is performed in step S1810, and this processing is terminated. To do. The symbol position adjustment process is a process of adjusting the symbol position so that the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 set as symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 stop without a sense of incongruity at the stop timing.

  The symbol position adjustment process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a complete deviation variation. If the current fluctuation pattern is not a perfect deviation fluctuation, it means that a jackpot fluctuation pattern command or a reach fluctuation pattern command has been received, which means that some reach fluctuation is performed. Therefore, in step S1902, it is determined whether or not the reach symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, whether or not the same main symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 that stops at any one of the effective lines is an even symbol. If the reach symbol is not a non-specific symbol but a specific symbol, a promotion effect process is performed in step S1903 to determine whether or not a promotion effect is to be performed.

  In the promotion effect process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, the current display mode is confirmed in step S2001. Specifically, it is confirmed which mode flag is set in the work RAM 523. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the first display mode. If the current display mode is the first display mode, the present process ends. That is, the promotion effect process is not performed when the current display mode is the first display mode. On the other hand, if the display mode is not the first display mode but the second display mode or the third display mode, a promotion effect lottery is performed in step S2003.

  The display control device 214 includes a promotion effect counter HC used for the promotion effect lottery, like the main control device 271, and determines whether or not the promotion effect lottery is won based on the counter value when performing the promotion effect lottery. Determine. The promotion effect counter HC is a loop counter that is periodically updated by 1 within a range of 0 to 104, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 104). In the second display mode, if the value of the promotion effect counter when performing the promotion effect lottery is 0 to 20, it is determined that the winner is won. In the third display mode, the value of the promotion effect counter when performing the promotion effect lottery is 0. If it is ˜52, it is determined to be a winner. That is, when the stop symbol command indicating that the combination of the specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines is received, the ratio to be determined to perform the promotion effect is 0 in the first display mode, and the second display In the mode, it is about 1/5, and in the third display mode, it is about 1/2. Similarly, the ratio of determining that the promotion effect is to be performed when a stop symbol command indicating that a deviation reach variation by a specific symbol is performed is 0 in the first display mode and approximately 5 minutes in the second display mode. 1 and about half in the third display mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the frequency at which the promotion effect is performed differs according to the display mode. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect lottery has been won. If it has not been won, the process is terminated. When the promotion effect lottery is won, the promotion flag is set in the work RAM 523 in step S2005, and the stop symbol changing process shown in steps S2006 to S2014 is performed.

  Here, prior to the description of the stop symbol changing process, the symbol variation pattern and the display effect performed in each variation pattern in the present embodiment will be described.

  “Full deviation fluctuation” means that the high-speed fluctuation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 starts simultaneously, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped after 5 seconds, and the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped after 6 seconds. The fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped after 7 seconds.

  More specifically, the speed at which the fluctuation speed of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the lapse of 1 second cannot recognize which symbol has reached the effective line (in this embodiment, it is 1 in 0.05 seconds). The variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started at a time so that the variation display for the symbol is performed). The high-speed fluctuation of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed until 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. After 4 seconds, the upper symbol row can recognize which symbol has reached the active line. The fluctuation speed of Z1 gradually decreases, and the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped after 5 seconds. Then, from the timing of 5 seconds when the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, the fluctuation speed of the lower symbol row Z3 gradually decreases so that it can be recognized which symbol has reached the active line. After a second, the change display of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. Furthermore, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 gradually decreases so that it can be recognized which symbol has reached the effective line from the timing of 6 seconds when the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. After a second, the change display of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. At this time, in the complete deviation variation, the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 do not stop at the same main symbol on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the fluctuations of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 A notice character and a reach character are not displayed together with the display.

  The “reach fluctuation” is the same as the complete deviation fluctuation until the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped after 6 seconds, but at this time, the same main symbol stops on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. This is a fluctuation pattern in which reach occurs and the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is continued even after 7 seconds. The reach fluctuation includes “normal reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation”. In the case of normal reach change, the notice character corresponding to the display mode is displayed with a predetermined probability when the reach occurs, and in the case of super reach change, the notice character corresponding to the display mode when the reach occurs. Is always displayed. In the case of a normal reach change, a notice character may be displayed, but a reach character is not displayed after that. In the case of a super reach change, at a predetermined timing after the notice character is displayed. A reach character corresponding to the display mode or reach line is displayed. Furthermore, the variation display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after the occurrence of the reach is different between the normal reach variation and the super reach variation.

  In the case of “normal reach fluctuation”, the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed so that the symbol “1” passes the middle line L2 (that is, reaches the left line L1) at the reach occurrence timing, and thereafter, any symbol is displayed on the active line. The display is variably displayed at a constant speed at which it can be recognized whether the symbol has arrived (in this embodiment, the speed at which the change display for one symbol is performed in 0.5 seconds). Then, when a preset stop symbol reaches the left line L1 at a timing after the “1” symbol reaches the middle line L2 again, the variable display is stopped.

  In the case of “super reach fluctuation”, the middle symbol row Z2 is the same as the normal reach fluctuation from the time “1” symbol passes the middle line L2 to the time “7” symbol passes the middle line L2 at the reach occurrence timing. Fluctuation display with speed. That is, the display is variably displayed at a constant speed at which it is possible to recognize which symbol has reached the effective line (in this embodiment, the speed at which one symbol is displayed in 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, a reach character corresponding to the display mode or reach line appears on the display screen at the timing when the symbol “7” passes the middle line L2, and the speed of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed at this timing. Specifically, the speed is changed to a speed at which it is not possible to recognize which symbol has reached the effective line (in this embodiment, the speed at which the fluctuation display for one symbol is performed in 0.05 seconds). After the reach character is displayed, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner at the same speed as that before the reach character is displayed again (that is, the change display for one symbol is performed in 0.5 seconds). The Then, when the preset stop symbol reaches the left line L1 at the timing after the reach character is displayed, the variable display is stopped.

  In the stop symbol changing process, in step S2006, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a normal reach variation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either a jackpot variation pattern command indicating normal reach variation or a reach variation pattern command indicating normal reach variation is received. If the current variation pattern is a normal reach variation, it is determined in steps S2007 and S2008 whether the reach line is the left line L1 or the right line L3. When the reach line is the left line L1 or the right line L3, the process proceeds to step S2009, and the normal reach symbol table is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49A, the normal reach symbol table is a table in which the correspondence between the reach symbol set based on the stop symbol command and the reach symbol that is actually stopped and displayed is determined. . More specifically, a stop symbol that stops on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 set based on the stop symbol command, and an upper symbol row Z1 and a lower symbol row Z3 that actually stop on the left line L1. It is a table in which the correspondence with a stop symbol is defined.

  As described above, in the case of normal reach fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed so that the symbol “1” passes the middle line L2 (that is, reaches the left line L1) at the time of reach occurrence, and thereafter, the constant symbol ( In the present embodiment, the display is variably displayed at a speed of 0.5 seconds). Therefore, in the case of normal reach fluctuation, the fluctuation display time varies depending on the symbol stopped on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2. For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), when a stop symbol command indicating that the combination of symbols “1” is to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 is transmitted from the main control device 271, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol It takes 6 seconds for the fluctuation display of the row Z3 to be stopped, and after the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, the “1” symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 reaches 9.5 again after reaching the middle line L2. Since (= 0.5 × 19) seconds are required and 0.5 seconds are required for this “1” symbol to reach the left line L1, the variable display time is 16 seconds. Here, if the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed so that the symbol “2” stops on the left line L1 on the display control device 214 side, the variable display time is 17 (= 6 + 0.5 × 19 + 0. 5 × 3) seconds, and the variable display cannot be completed within the variable display time determined by the main controller 271. However, when the “1” symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the “2” symbol is stopped and displayed on the right line L3. That is, when the main control device 271 determines that the combination of symbols “1” is to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1, each symbol row is displayed on the display control device 214 side so that the combination of the symbols “2” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3. Even if the stop symbols of Z1 to Z3 are changed, there is no difference in the variable display time from the case where the combination of “1” symbols is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, and the symbols are within the variable display time determined by the main controller 271. There is no problem that the variable display cannot be terminated. Similarly, when a stop symbol command indicating that the combination of symbols “1” is to be stopped and displayed on the right line L3 is transmitted from the main controller 271, the symbol “4” in the middle symbol row Z2 stops on the left line L1. Therefore, even if the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed on the display control device 214 side so as to stop the combination of the symbol “4” in the left line L1, the symbol is displayed within the variable display time determined by the main controller 271. There is no problem that the variable display cannot be terminated.

  Therefore, in step S2010, based on the reference result of the normal reach symbol table, the stop symbol that stops at the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 set in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 523 is changed, The process ends. More specifically, when the reach symbol set based on the stop symbol command is the “9” symbol of the left line L1 and the “1” symbol of the right line L3, the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 The stop symbol that stops at the left line L1 is changed. In other cases, only the stop symbol that stops at the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 is changed. This is because the main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, and between the “9” symbol and “1” symbol in the middle symbol row Z2. This is because only “4” symbols are arranged. In other words, when the promotion effect is won and the normal reach variation is performed in which the specific symbol stops as the reach symbol on the left line L1 or the right line L3, the non-specific symbol stops as the reach symbol on the right line L3 or the left line L1 It can be said that the reach pattern is changed so as to perform normal reach fluctuation. The received variation pattern command is a reach variation pattern command, and if the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is changed based on the reference result of the normal reach symbol table, a combination of jackpot symbols is formed. In this case, the above symbols (reach symbols) are not changed. For example, when the stop symbols that stop on the left line L1 of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 set based on the stop symbol command are “3” symbol, “9” symbol, “3” symbol in order from the upper symbol row Z1 When the stop symbol is changed so that the “4” symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 stops at the right line L3 based on the normal reach symbol table, “4” symbol, “4a” symbol on the right line L3, The combination of the “4” symbol and the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in such a case, this process is terminated without changing the stop symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. In other words, if changing the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 based on the reference result of the normal reach symbol table results in the combination of the jackpot symbol, the change of the reach symbol is prohibited. It can be said that there is.

  On the other hand, when the reach line is neither the left line L1 nor the right line L3 (when both step S2007 and step S2008 are NO), even if the promotion effect lottery is won, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol line This process is terminated without changing the stop symbol of the column Z3. When the reach line is neither the left line L1 nor the right line L3, it means that the reach line is any one of the middle line L2, the right falling line L4, and the right rising line L5. In this case, the jackpot symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops at the middle line L2 in any reach line. When the jackpot symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops at the middle line L2, in the present embodiment in which the main symbol and the sub symbol are alternately arranged, the main symbol of the middle symbol row does not stop at the other effective lines. That is, when the reach line is neither the left line L1 nor the right line L3, it is necessary to change the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 in order to stop the combination of the non-specific symbols to one of the effective lines. When the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed, the variable display time is changed. Therefore, if the reach line is not each of the above lines, the present process is terminated without changing the reach symbol even when the promotion effect lottery is won.

  If it is determined in step S2006 that the current variation pattern is not a normal reach variation, it means that a jackpot variation pattern command or a reach variation pattern command indicating a super reach variation has been received. In such a case, the process advances to step S2011 to refer to the super reach symbol table.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the super reach symbol table is a table in which the correspondence between the reach symbol set based on the stop symbol command and the reach symbol that is actually stopped and displayed is determined. More specifically, a stop symbol that stops on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 set based on the stop symbol command, and an upper symbol row Z1 and a lower symbol row Z3 that actually stop on the left line L1. It is a table in which the correspondence with a stop symbol is defined. FIG. 50A is a super reach symbol table for a so-called single reach with only one reach line, and FIG. 50B is a super reach symbol table for a so-called double reach with two reach lines. . Here, unlike the normal reach symbol table, the super reach symbol table is set to change the reach symbol without changing the reach line. That is, when the big hit variation pattern command is received, the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is also changed. In such a case, there is a concern that the symbol variation display may not end within the variation display time determined by the main controller 271. However, as described above, in the case of a super reach variation, when the reach character is displayed. In order to change the speed of the middle symbol row Z2 to high speed, the symbol fluctuation display can be ended within the fluctuation display time determined by the main controller 271 by replacing the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 during the high speed fluctuation. it can.

  After referring to the super reach symbol table, in step S2012, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a jackpot variation pattern command is received. If the jackpot variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2013, and on the left line L1 of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 523 based on the reference result of the super reach symbol table. The stop symbol to be stopped is changed, and this process is terminated. If the reach variation pattern command is received instead of the jackpot variation pattern command, the process advances to step S2014 to stop at the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 set in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 523. The stop symbol to be changed is changed, and this process is terminated. If the combination of jackpot symbols is formed when the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is changed based on the reference result of the super reach symbol table, the above symbols (reach symbols) are changed. do not do. In other words, if changing the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 based on the reference result of the super reach symbol table results in the combination of the jackpot symbol, the change of the reach symbol is prohibited. It can be said that it is.

  Returning to the description of the symbol position adjustment process in FIG. 47, if the reach symbol is a non-specific symbol, or after performing the promotion effect process, the process proceeds to step S1904, and the reach effect determination process for determining a specific reach effect is performed. Do. The reach production determination process is a process of determining a notice character, a reach character, or the like to be displayed when jackpot variation or reach variation is performed.

  The reach effect determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a jackpot variation pattern command is received, that is, whether or not the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation. If a big hit variation pattern command has been received, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether a specific command has been received, that is, whether a specific big hit has been received. If the specific command is received, the process further proceeds to step S2103, and the stop symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 523 stops and displays the combination of the specific symbols on one of the effective lines. It is discriminated whether or not it is an indication. If all of Steps S2101 to S2103 are YES, that is, if the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation that causes a specific jackpot, and if the combination of the specific symbols is to be finally stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, the process proceeds to Step S2104. Perform premium production lottery processing. Although detailed description is omitted, the display control device 214 includes a premium effect counter used for the premium effect lottery, and determines whether the premium effect lottery is won based on the counter value at the time of performing the processing. To do. The winning probability of the premium production lottery is fixed regardless of the current display mode, and is about 1/200 in the present embodiment. That is, the probability that a premium effect will be performed when a combination of specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed is about 1/200. In step S2105, it is determined whether or not a premium production lottery has been won. If a prize is won, a premium notice character or premium reach character corresponding to the current display mode, reach line, or the like is set to perform a premium production in step S2106. Then, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of any of steps S2101 to S2103 and step S2105 is NO, a normal notice character, a normal reach character, or the like corresponding to the current display mode, reach line, or the like is set to perform a normal performance. Then, this process ends.

  In other words, in the reach effect determination process, a premium notice character or premium corresponding to perform a premium effect only when the premium effect lottery is a big hit fluctuation that finally stops and displays a combination of specific symbols on one of the active lines. Set the reach character. On the other hand, in other cases, that is, when the outlier reach variation is performed, or when the jackpot variation is performed in which the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the final stop on one of the effective lines. If the jackpot change is performed but the premium lottery is not won, a corresponding normal notice character, normal reach character, or the like is set so as to perform the normal performance instead of the premium performance. Furthermore, it can be said that in the reach effect determination process, identification information other than symbols displayed during symbol variation display is determined, and display of identification information not related to variation display time is determined.

  Returning to the description of the symbol position adjustment process of FIG. 47, after the reach effect determination process is performed, in step S1905, the stopped symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 stops at the left line L1 after 5 seconds, and the lower symbol row Z3 after 6 seconds. The symbol positions of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are adjusted so that the stop symbol of the second symbol stops at the left line L1, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the current variation pattern is a complete deviation variation, the stopped symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 stops at the left line L1 after 5 seconds, and the lower symbol row Z3 stops after 6 seconds. The symbol positions of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are adjusted so that the symbol stops on the left line L1, and the stopped symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops on the left line L1 after 7 seconds, and this processing is terminated.

  The symbol position adjustment process starts promptly based on the reception of the lower symbol command and ends before the high-speed fluctuation of the upper symbol row Z1 ends (that is, 4 seconds elapse). Therefore, the symbol position adjustment process is a symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 during high-speed fluctuation so that the symbols of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 set as symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 stop without a sense of incongruity at the stop timing. It can be said that this is a process of replacing the symbols.

  Returning to the description of the variable display process of FIG. 46, if it is determined in step S1807 that a stop symbol command has not been received, the process advances to step S1811 to determine whether a variable end command has been received. If the change end command has not been received, the process advances to step S1812, the display control process is performed, and the process ends. In the display control process, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner with the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command, and characters such as premium reach characters set in the reach effect determination process described above are displayed at a predetermined timing. This is a process for controlling the display of the symbol display control device 41 to be performed. If a change end command is received in step S1811, the process advances to step S1813 to execute a change end process for ending the symbol change display, and the process ends.

  Here, an outline of the display control performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 214 when the symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  When receiving the lottery result command, the CPU 521 starts various arithmetic processes such as generating an internal command for the image controller 526. The internal command is a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of the symbol variation display. For example, the symbol high-speed variation data, normal reach variation data, super reach variation data, notice character display data, reach character display Internal commands including control data such as data are stored in the program ROM 522 in advance. The CPU 521 generates a necessary internal command each time based on the information stored in the work RAM 523 (that is, the symbol variation pattern, the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the determined reach effect, etc.), and The included control data is sequentially output to the image controller 526. As a result, the image controller 526 performs a drawing process in accordance with a command (internal command) from the CPU 521, and causes the symbol display device 41 to variably display symbols or to display reach characters. At this time, the CPU 521 transmits a control command for driving the voices and the lamps to the voice lamp control device 272 in synchronization with the display effect at each time. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 272 drives sounds and lamps in accordance with the control command from the CPU 521. When the lottery result command is received, the symbol variation display is continued under the cooperation of the CPU 521 and the image controller 526 until the variation end command is received thereafter.

  Next, a specific procedure of the jackpot display process performed by the display control device 214 after the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot state will be outlined. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process executed by the CPU 521 in the display control device 214. The display control device 214 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 while processing various commands transmitted from the main control device 271 according to the procedure shown in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a jackpot state. If it is not a big hit state, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not a state transition command has been received. If it has not been received, this process is terminated. If the state transition command is received in step S2202, it means that the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot state. In such a case, 15 is set in the display round counter HRC provided in the work RAM 523 in step S2203, the big win state is changed in step S2204, and the big prize opening / closing is performed up to 15 rounds. The opening process is started to display the opening moving image that teaches on the symbol display device 41, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that the gaming state is a jackpot state, it is determined in step S2205 whether an open command has been received. When the opening command is received, it means that the big prize opening is opened. Therefore, when an opening command is received, the opening process shown in steps S2206 to S2209 is performed, and this process is terminated. The opening process will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S2205 that an open command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a close command has been received in step S2210. If not received, the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing command is received, it means that the big prize opening that has been in the open state has been switched to the closed state, that is, one round has been completed. In such a case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display round counter HRC in step S2211, and it is determined whether or not the value of the display round counter HRC is 0 in step S2212. If the value of the display round counter HRC is not 0, it means that the 15th round has not been completed. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S2213, and the pre-release video that teaches the player the number of rounds and the like for the next round is displayed. The pre-opening process is started and the present process is terminated. Further, if the value of the display round counter HRC is 0, it means that 15 rounds have ended, so that an ending video that teaches that the jackpot state will end in step S2214 should be displayed on the symbol display device 41. The ending process is started and this process is terminated.

  In the opening process performed under the situation where the big prize opening is opened, first, in step S2206, it is determined whether or not the promotion flag is set. If the promotion flag is not set, the open processing is started in step S2208 in order to display the current number of rounds, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening during the round, and the like on the symbol display device 41. End the process. On the other hand, when the promotion flag is set, the winning effect lottery of the main control device 271 or the display control device 214 is won, and the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the active line under the condition of specific jackpot Means that. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the value of the display round counter HRC is 1 in step S2207. If it is not 1, open processing is performed in step S2208, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the display round counter HRC is 1, the promotion notification process is performed to display the promotion effect for notifying that it is a specific jackpot in step S2209 on the symbol display device 41, and this process is terminated.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the promotion flag is not set, that is, when the combination of specific symbols is displayed as a final stop and shifts to the big hit state, the combination of non-specific big wins and non-specific symbols is finally stopped. When it is displayed and the game is shifted to the big win state, the number of current rounds, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening during the round, and the like are displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 from 1 round to 15 rounds. On the other hand, when the promotion flag is set, that is, when the combination is a specific jackpot and a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and the jackpot state is entered, the display screen of the symbol display device 41 from 1 round to 14 rounds The current number of rounds, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening during the round, and the like are displayed, and a promotion effect is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 in the 15th round, that is, the final round. The Therefore, even when a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and a big hit occurs, it is possible to play a game under the big hit state while expecting a promotion effect to be performed in 15 rounds, It is possible to prevent the game under the big hit state from becoming monotonous. The promotion flag set in the case of big hit fluctuation is cleared in the ending process S2214 described above, and the promotion flag set in the case of outlier reach fluctuation is cleared at the end of the fluctuation.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  By configuring the combination of non-specific symbols to be displayed as a final stop in the case of a specific win, even if the combination of non-specific symbols is displayed as a final stop, a high probability after the end of the jackpot state It is possible to leave room for transition to a state, and it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game.

  When the main control device 271 determines to perform normal reach variation that causes the combination of specific symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the left line L1 or the right line L3, the display control device 214 sets the combination of non-specific symbols to the right line L3 or the left line L1. By adopting a configuration in which the reach symbol can be changed so that the final stop display is performed, it is possible to avoid the harmony between the elapsed timing of the variable display time and the timing of the final stop display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . This is because, since the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, is not changed, the variable display time required until each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is finally stopped and displayed does not change. Therefore, in the configuration in which the main control device 271 determines the variable display time and the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control device 214 relating to the variable display of the symbols, which is displayed on the display screen. By diversifying display effects, it is possible to suppress monotonous gaming.

  In this way, in the configuration in which the variable display time changes depending on the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, that is, in the configuration in which the stop symbol of the final stop symbol sequence where the variable display ends last is associated with the variable display time. If the stop symbol of the last stop symbol sequence is changed on the display control device 214 side, the harmony between the elapsed timing of the variable display time and the timing of the final symbol display of each symbol sequence is lost. Certainly, if the change speed of the symbol is changed or the symbol is replaced, it is possible to avoid harming the harmony between the elapsed timing of the change display time and the timing of the last stop display of each symbol row. However, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the symbol fluctuation speed is changed by normal reach fluctuation, there is a normal reach fluctuation in which the symbol fluctuation speed is changed and a normal reach fluctuation that is not changed, and there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. The In addition, there is a concern that the player may perceive that the promotion effect will be performed if the changing speed of the symbol is changed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row so that there is an opportunity for both the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol of the final stop symbol row to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen. Since each stop position is an effective line, the combination of jackpot symbols to be displayed for final stop can be changed on the display control device side without changing the stop symbol of the final stop symbol sequence. Therefore, it is possible to avoid losing the harmony between the elapsed timing of the variable display time and the timing of the final stop display of each symbol row without changing the symbol variation speed or replacing symbols. As a result, the degree of freedom of the display control device regarding the variable display of each symbol row can be increased even in the configuration in which the stop symbol and the variable display time of the final stop symbol sequence at which the variable display ends last are associated with each other. It becomes possible.

  By setting three types of display modes with different winning probabilities for promotion effect lottery as display modes, and providing a selection switch 108 on the front side of the bulging portion 22 so that the player can change the display mode, It becomes possible for the player to select a preferred display mode. That is, if the player wants to determine whether or not a specific big win is determined by the combination of symbols that are displayed in the final stop, the first display mode may be selected, and if the player wants to determine whether or not a specific big win is determined by the promotion effect. This is because the third display mode may be selected, and the second display mode may be selected for a player who wants to enjoy any gameability. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably suppress monotonization of the game.

  By making the selection switch 108 electrically connected to the display controller 214 and electrically disconnected from the main controller 271, the display controller 214 can manage the display mode independently of the main controller 271. This makes it possible to suppress monotonization of the game without increasing the processing load of the main control device 271. Further, by making the selection switch 108 electrically disconnected from the main controller 271, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from outside the gaming machine to the main controller 271.

  In the present embodiment, not only the display control device 214 but also the main control device 271 determines whether or not the promotion effect is performed, and the main control device 271 has a probability of about 1/13 that is a specific big hit. It is decided that promotion promotion will be performed. Therefore, in the case of a specific jackpot, the probability that a stop symbol command indicating that the combination of specific symbols will be finally stopped and displayed from the main controller 271 to the display controller 214 is about 12/13. In addition, when the stop symbol command is received, the display control device 214 determines that the promotion effect lottery is not performed in the first display mode and the promotion effect is performed with a probability of about 1/5 in the second display mode, In the third display mode, it is determined that the promotion effect is performed with a probability of about one half. As a result, the probability that the promotion effect is performed in the case of a specific jackpot is about one-third in the first display mode, about one-fourth in the second display mode, and about 2 in the third display mode. A fraction. In this way, by setting a plurality of display modes and managing the display modes independently, the display control device 214 independently performs display on the display control device 214 side without increasing the processing load of the main control device 271. It becomes possible to diversify the production and to suppress the monotony of the game.

  In the case of normal reach fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed so that the “1” symbol passes through the middle line L2 at the reach occurrence timing, and thereafter, a constant symbol (in this embodiment, one symbol is 0.5 seconds). Fluctuation is displayed at the speed at which the minute fluctuation is displayed. Therefore, in the case of normal reach fluctuation, the fluctuation display time varies depending on the symbol stopped on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2. Here, if the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to be finally stopped and displayed on the left line L1 is changed on the display control device 214 side, the variation display is terminated within the variation display time determined by the main control device 271. Or the next variable display cannot be started because the variable display time has not passed even though the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has already ended. For example, when the main controller 271 determines that the “7” symbol combination is to be finally stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the display controller 214 side displays the “8” symbol combination on the left line L1 so as to be finally stopped and displayed. When the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed, the symbol variation display cannot be terminated within the variation display time. Further, when the main controller 271 determines that the combination of “7” symbols is to be displayed on the left line L1 as a final stop display, the display controller 214 side displays the combination of the “6” symbols on the left line L1 as a final stop display. When the stop symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed, the symbol variation display ends one second earlier than the timing of the variation display time. However, when a plurality of effective lines are set and the specific symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped at the left line L1 (right line L3), the non-specific symbol is stopped at the right line L3 (left line L1). In the configuration, if only the reach symbol is changed, the combination of non-specific symbols can be finally stopped and displayed, and the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 can be terminated at the timing of the variation display time. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variable display time varies depending on the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are finally stopped and displayed, the harmony between the elapsed timing of the variable display time and the timing that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are finally stopped and displayed. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control device regarding the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 while avoiding damage to the symbols.

  When the promotion effect lottery is won, the display control device 214 is configured to change the reach pattern not only in the case of big hit fluctuation but also in the case of outlier reach fluctuation. When main controller 271 determines that the combination of specific symbols is to be finally stopped and displayed on left line L1 (right line L3), display controller 214 finally stops the combination of non-specific symbols on right line L3 (left line L1). When the reach design can be changed so as to be displayed, the combination of specific symbols is displayed in the final stop display on the left line L1 (right line L3), which reduces the chance of generating a big hit, and the right line L3. The combination of non-specific symbols is displayed as a final stop display on (left line L1), and the chances of generating a jackpot increase. For example, in the third display mode, the reach symbol is changed with a probability of about one half, so the opportunity for the final stop display of the combination of specific symbols on the left line L1 (right line L3) is the right line L3 (left The line L1) will be about one third of the chance that the combination of non-specific symbols will be finally stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the reach on the left line L1 (right line L3) by the specific symbol and the reach on the right line L3 (left line L1) by the non-specific symbol are performed at the same frequency, the left line L1 (right line by the specific symbol) The ratio of occurrence of jackpot from the reach at L3) decreases, and the ratio of occurrence of jackpot from the reach at the right line L3 (left line L1) due to non-specific symbols increases. This leads to fluctuations in the expected value for generating a jackpot depending on the reach pattern and reach line when the reach occurs. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that changes the reach design even in the case of out-of-bounds fluctuation, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned fluctuation of the expected value, which is the case where reach due to which design occurs on any effective line. Can be expected to have a big hit.

  Regardless of whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the reach design is changed by referring to the normal reach design table, and in a configuration in which multiple types of non-specific symbols and specific symbols are variably displayed, reach by a predetermined non-specific symbol can be achieved. It is possible to suppress an increase or decrease in the chance of generating a big hit as compared with the reach based on other non-specific symbols. Therefore, even if the reach by which symbol occurs in any effective line, it can be expected to generate a jackpot. In addition, because the promotion effect lottery is performed with the same winning probability regardless of whether or not a jackpot has occurred, there is an increased chance that the reach by a predetermined non-specific symbol will be a big hit compared to the reach by other non-specific symbols Or it can suppress that it falls.

  The main control unit 271 is also configured to perform the promotion lottery, and when the promotion lottery is won, the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is determined so that the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed even if it is a specific jackpot. The configuration is such that the variable display time is determined. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to expect a transition to a high probability state after the jackpot state ends even if a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on any active line. Monotonization can be suitably suppressed. That is, when the main controller 271 determines to perform a normal reach variation in which the combination of specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on any one of the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5, the display controller 214 side The stop symbol cannot be changed so that the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped. Under such circumstances, since the non-specific symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is not stopped and displayed on any active line, it is necessary to change not only the reach symbol but also the stopped symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, which is a variable display time. Because it leads to change. Further, when the main control device 271 side is configured not to determine the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 so that the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed in the case of a specific hit, each of the above-mentioned effective lines L2, L4, L5 When the combination of non-specific symbols is displayed in the final stop state, there is no room for shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, in the main controller 271 side, in the case of a specific hit, any effective line can be determined by determining the stop pattern of each pattern row so that the combination of non-specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on any effective line. Even if a combination of non-specific symbols is displayed as a final stop, it is possible to expect a transition to a high-probability state after the end of the jackpot state, and it is possible to suitably suppress monotonization of the game Become.

  When the promotion lottery is won, the reach design is changed by the main controller 271 even in the case of a detachment reach with a specific design. By adopting such a configuration, the expected value that will generate a jackpot when a reach occurs due to a specific symbol will decrease, or the expected value that will generate a jackpot when a reach due to a non-specific symbol will increase. It becomes possible to suppress. Therefore, even if the reach by which symbol occurs in any effective line, it can be expected to generate a jackpot.

  Predetermined non-specification by setting the reach symbol table so that the reach symbols that will be displayed in the final stop will be the same non-specific symbol when winning the promotion lottery with a specific jackpot and when winning the promotion lottery with a missed reach It is possible to suppress an increase or decrease in the chance that the symbol reach will be a big hit compared to the other non-specific symbol reach. Therefore, even if the reach by which symbol occurs in any effective line, it can be expected to generate a jackpot. Also, because the promotion lottery is performed with the same winning probability regardless of whether or not the jackpot has occurred, the chance that the reach by a predetermined non-specific symbol will be a big hit compared to the reach by other non-specific symbols, or It becomes possible to suppress that it falls.

  When a combination of non-specific symbols that is a specific jackpot is displayed as a final stop display, a combination of non-specific symbols is displayed as a final stop by providing a promotion effect that informs you that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. Even if the game is shifted to the jackpot state, it is possible to play the game under the jackpot state while expecting the promotion effect to be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress not only the game under the normal game state but also the monotonization of the game under the big hit state.

  The embodiment in which a plurality of effective lines are set by arranging the main symbols in descending order in the upper symbol row Z1 and arranging the main symbols in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenienced by the combination of specific symbols being displayed on one of the active lines as the final stop and the combination of non-specific symbols being displayed at the final stop on the other active lines. Is possible. Further, by arranging the “4” symbol between the “9” symbol and the “1” symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol in which the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol are alternately arranged at equal intervals in the middle symbol row Z2. When the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 (right line L3), the non-specific symbol can be stopped and displayed on the right line L3 (left line L1). Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance of changing the reach symbol on the display control device 214 side, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display control device 214 regarding the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

  When the promotion effect lottery is won in a situation where super reach variation is performed, the display control device 214 is configured to change the symbols of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the case of the super reach change, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed at a high speed at the timing when the reach character after the reach occurs is displayed. Therefore, by changing the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 at a timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is changed at high speed, the timing of the change display time determined by the main controller 271 and each symbol row can be determined without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. It is possible to achieve harmony with the timing of Z1 to Z3 for final stop display. This is because the player cannot recognize which symbol has reached the active line during the high-speed fluctuation, and moreover, the player tends to watch the reach character at such timing. In addition, when the promotion effect lottery is won in a situation where super reach fluctuation is performed, a reach character appears because the stop symbol determined by the main controller 271 is changed to a non-specific symbol located one symbol away. It is possible to suppress the player from noticing that the symbols have been replaced at the timing after the display.

  Premium reach character or premium reach character corresponding to perform premium production only in the case of winning the premium production lottery that is a big hit change that finally stops and displays a combination of specific symbols on one of the active lines in the reach production determination process And so on. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the premium effect to be performed, and it is possible to enhance the player's superiority when the premium effect is performed. In addition, there is a possibility that a premium effect will be performed only when a combination of specific symbols is displayed at the final stop, so only the player has a sense of superiority against the occurrence of a specific jackpot instead of a non-special jackpot In other words, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority with respect to the premium performance being performed, and it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the game.

  Here, it is certainly possible to adopt a configuration in which a premium effect lottery is performed based on reception of the jackpot variation pattern command and the stop symbol command indicating that the combination of the specific symbols is to be finally stopped and displayed. However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that the stop symbol command may not be accurately recognized due to the occurrence of noise or the like. Then, the stop indicating that the display control device 214 displays the combination of the specific symbols in the final stop state even though the stop symbol command indicating that the combination of the non-specific symbols is displayed as the final stop is transmitted from the main control device 271. There is a possibility that the command is erroneously recognized as a symbol command, and that the promotion effect lottery is won and the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In such a case, although the premium effect is performed, the high probability state is not shifted. This leads to a decrease in the player's sense of superiority by not being a specific jackpot despite the increased player's sense of superiority as a result of the premium performance, and the game willingness to play the game itself It can lead to a decline. Therefore, a lottery result command indicating the lottery result is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 271 to the display control device 214, and a premium effect lottery is performed on the condition that the specific command is received as one of the conditions. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the above problems.

(Second Embodiment)
In the above embodiment, the main control device 271 transmits a lottery result command, a promotion command, a variation pattern command, and a stop symbol command to the display control device 214, and the display control device 214 is promoted based on the contents indicated by these commands. Although it was set as the structure which determines whether production is performed, this structure is changed. That is, main controller 271 transmits only the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command to display controller 214, and determines whether display controller 214 performs the promotion effect based on the contents indicated by these commands. The basic configuration of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, such as the symbol arrangement and the variation pattern, is the same as that in the above embodiment, and only the differences from the above embodiment will be described here.

  As shown in FIG. 53, main controller 271 in the present embodiment has a jackpot type counter C2a used when determining the jackpot type, and stop symbols of symbol blocks Z1 to Z3 that are finally stopped and displayed in the case of jackpot. Is separately provided with a jackpot symbol counter C2b which is used when determining.

  The big hit type counter C2a is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 9 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 9). In the present embodiment, whether or not a specific big hit is determined by the big hit type counter C2a, for example, C2a = 0 to 5 corresponds to a specific big hit, and C2a = 6 to 9 corresponds to a non-specific big hit. To do. That is, it becomes a specific jackpot with 6/10 of the jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2a is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503. Then, the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.

  The jackpot symbol counter C2b is a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 24 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 24). In this embodiment, the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is determined by the jackpot symbol counter C2b. The jackpot symbol counter C2b is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503. Then, the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.

  Other counter configurations such as the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3 and the like are the same as in the above embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. However, in this embodiment, the promoted random number at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33. The value of the counter C4 is not stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. This is a contrivance for suppressing the amount of data to be stored in the reserved ball storage area from increasing and the storage capacity of the RAM 503 from being pressed.

  Next, the fluctuation start process performed by the main controller 271 will be described. In the variation start process according to the present embodiment, if it is determined that the jackpot is determined in step S801, the jackpot time process illustrated in FIG. 54 is performed instead of the processes in steps S802 to S810 illustrated in FIG. Accordingly, the big hit processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the big hit time process, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit type counter C2a stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is 5 or less. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2a is 5 or less, it means that it is a specific jackpot. Therefore, in step S2302, the red display flag is set so that the final display color of the first specific lamp unit 47 is red, and in step S2303, the specific flag is set. However, unlike the above embodiment, the specific command transmitted to the display control device 214 is not set.

  In a succeeding step S2304, it is determined whether or not the value of the promoted random number counter C4 stored in the promoted random number counter buffer of the RAM 503 is 8 or less. If it is determined that the value of the promoted random number counter C4 is not 8 or less, it means that the promotion lottery was not won. In such a case, in step S2305, the specific symbol table is referred to, and the combination of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is obtained.

  Here, the specific symbol table is a table in which the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b and the combination of specific symbols is defined as shown in FIG. 55 (a). More specifically, it is a table in which the correspondence relationship between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b and the stopped symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed on the left line L1 when the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2304 that the value of the promoted random number counter C4 is 8 or less, it means that the promotion lottery has been won. In such a case, a promotion flag is set in step S2306. However, unlike the above embodiment, the promotion command transmitted to the display control device 214 is not set. In the subsequent step S2307, a combination of non-specific symbols corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is obtained with reference to the non-specific symbol table.

  Here, the non-specific symbol table is a table in which the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b and the combination of non-specific symbols is defined as shown in FIG. 55 (b). More specifically, it is a table in which the correspondence relationship between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b and the stopped symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 when the combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. .

  As described above, the present embodiment separately includes a symbol table that is referred to when a combination of specific symbols is stopped and a symbol table that is referred to when a combination of non-specific symbols is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, the promoted symbol table as in the above embodiment is not necessary, and the amount of data stored in advance can be reduced. Needless to say, an elevated symbol table may be provided separately from the non-specific symbol table. The promoted symbol table here is a table in which the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b and the combination of the non-specific symbols is determined instead of the jackpot type counter C2 described in the above embodiment.

  After referring to the specific symbol table or the non-specific symbol table, in step S2308, a stop symbol command indicating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 is set for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 based on the reference result, and this processing is performed. finish.

  In step S2301, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2a is not 5 or less, it means that it is a non-specific jackpot. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S2309, and a green display flag is set so that the final display color of the first specific lamp unit 47 is green. However, unlike the above embodiment, the non-specific command transmitted to the display control device 214 is not set. In step S2310, the combination of the non-specific symbols corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2b stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is obtained with reference to the non-specific symbol table described above. Thereafter, in step S2308, stop symbol commands indicating symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 are set for the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 based on the reference result, and this process is terminated.

  After the jackpot processing is performed, in step S811, a jackpot variation pattern until the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 is confirmed, and a rough reach type such as normal reach or super reach is determined based on the value. Note that the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS and the variation pattern is defined in advance by a table (not shown).

  In step S812, the fluctuation display time is derived based on the decided fluctuation pattern and the stopped symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Specifically, it is based on a table (not shown) in which the relationship between the reach type such as normal reach, super reach, etc., and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, and the variable display time is defined. To derive the variable display time. Thereafter, in step S813, a jackpot variation pattern command indicating the presence or absence of the promotion flag is set based on the presence or absence of the promotion flag. In the following step S814, the variable display time derived in step S812 is set in the timer for measuring the switching display time of the first specific lamp unit 47, and this process is terminated.

  Here, the variation pattern command in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the variable display time uniquely corresponds to the reach type and the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. As shown in FIG. 56, for example, when the fluctuation display time is 16 seconds, the “1” symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is a normal reach fluctuation in which the left line L1 is stopped and displayed, and a super reach fluctuation or a complete deviation fluctuation is performed. There is nothing. The change display time of the super reach fluctuation when the “1” symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 is 16.3 seconds, and the “1” symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed on the left line L1. The fluctuation display time of the complete deviation fluctuation is 7 seconds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation display time is prepared in advance. In addition to this, even if the reach type and the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 are the same, different variation pattern commands are prepared in advance depending on the presence or absence of the promotion effect. For example, when the combination of “2” symbols on the right line L3 is finally stopped and displayed on the right line L3 due to normal reach variation, the variation display time is 16 seconds. “01H” is set as the command, and “15H” is set as the variation pattern command when the promotion effect is performed (that is, in the case of a specific jackpot).

  Note that the processing in the case where it is determined that it is not a big hit in step S801 is the same as that in the above embodiment except that no out-of-command is set, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  By the way, in the external output process S501 in the present embodiment, when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, each time the normal processing is performed in the order of the variation pattern command → the upper symbol command → the middle symbol command → the lower symbol command (that is, every 4 msec). Command), and the change end command is output at the timing when the change display time (switching display time) has elapsed. As described above, the lottery result command and the promotion command are not output.

  Next, symbol variation display processing performed by the symbol display device 214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received. When the variation pattern command is received, the received content is stored in the work RAM 523 and the process proceeds to step S2402, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is started so that each symbol row Z1 to Z3 starts high-speed variation. Exit. Based on the reception of the variation pattern command, the display control device 214 grasps the variation pattern to be performed this time, the variation display time, and whether or not the main control device 271 has decided to perform the promotion effect, and displays these grasped contents. Store in the work RAM 523. When the variation type to be performed this time is reach variation, the stop symbol of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is also grasped based on the reception of the variation pattern command.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that a variation pattern command has not been received, it is determined in step S2403 whether a stop symbol command has been received. When the stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol of the left line L1 indicated by the stop symbol command is set in the stop symbol storage area provided in the work RAM 523 in step S2404. In the following step S2405, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol command received this time is a lower symbol command. As described above, main controller 271 transmits a stop symbol command one by one for each normal process in the order of upper symbol command → middle symbol command → lower symbol command. Therefore, when the stop symbol command received this time is not the lower symbol command, it means that the stop symbol commands of all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 have not been received, and thus this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the stop symbol command received this time is a symbol command below, this means that the stop symbol commands for all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 have been received, so the symbol position adjustment processing is performed in step S2406, and this processing is terminated. To do.

  The symbol position adjustment process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a complete deviation variation. If the current fluctuation pattern is not a perfect deviation fluctuation, it means a jackpot fluctuation or an outlier reach fluctuation, and this means that some reach fluctuation is performed. Therefore, in step S2502, it is determined whether or not the reach symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, whether or not the same main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 that stops at any one of the effective lines is an even symbol. If the reach symbol is not a non-specific symbol but a specific symbol, a promotion effect process is performed in step S2503 to determine whether or not a promotion effect is to be performed. Since the promotion effect process is the same as that in the above embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. After performing the promotion effect process in step S2503, or when the reach symbol is a non-specific symbol, the reach effect process is performed in step S2504. As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery result command is not transmitted from the main controller 271. For this reason, in the reach effect processing, when the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stored in the stop symbol storage area means that the combination of specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on any effective line A premium production lottery is performed, and a premium production is set when the lottery is won.

  After performing the reach effect determination process, or when the current variation pattern is a complete deviation variation, in step S2505, the symbol positions of all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are adjusted, and this processing is terminated. Specifically, when the current variation pattern is a completely off-variation variation, the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 stops on the left line L1 after 5 seconds, and the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 becomes the left line L1 after 6 seconds. After stopping, the symbol positions of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are adjusted so that the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops on the left line L1 after 7 seconds, and this processing is terminated. If the current variation pattern is a big hit variation or out of reach variation, the stop symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 stops on the left line L1 after 5 seconds, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 becomes on the left line L1 after 6 seconds. The symbol position of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is adjusted so that the “1” symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 passes the middle line L2 at the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z2, and this processing ends.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation display process of FIG. 57, if it is determined in step S2403 that a stop symbol command has not been received, the process advances to step S2407 to determine whether a fluctuation end command has been received. If the change end command has not been received, the process advances to step S2408 to perform display control processing, and this processing ends. If a change end command is received in step S2407, the process advances to step S2409 to execute a change end process for ending the symbol change display, and the process ends.

  According to the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2a used when determining the jackpot type, and the jackpot symbol counter used when determining the stop symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be finally stopped and displayed in the case of the jackpot Since C2b is provided separately, the ratio of specific jackpot occurrence to jackpot occurrence can be set relatively easily.

  Here, a configuration is considered in which the jackpot type and the stop symbol to be displayed for final stop are determined based only on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as in the first embodiment.

  In such a case, in order to make 6/10 of the jackpot occurrence a specific jackpot, it is necessary to make C2 = 0-29 correspond to the specific jackpot and C2 = 30-49 correspond to the non-specific jackpot. That is, it is necessary to make 30 out of 50 counter values correspond to a specific jackpot and the other 20 to correspond to a non-specific jackpot. At this time, when there are 50 stop patterns for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that generate jackpots, and 25 of them are stop patterns that generate a specific jackpot, the following problems occur. In other words, there are 30 values of the jackpot type counter C2 to be associated in spite of the fact that there are 25 stop patterns that generate specific jackpots, so any one of the stop patterns corresponds more than other stop patterns. Will be attached. This leads to an increase in the chance that the final stop display of any stop pattern is increased when a specific jackpot occurs. Similarly, since there are only 20 values of the jackpot type counter C2 to be associated even though there are 25 types of stop patterns that cause non-specific jackpots, one of the stop patterns is associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. I can't. This leads to no opportunity for the final stop display of the stop pattern.

  In this way, in the configuration in which the jackpot type and the stop symbol to be displayed for final stop are determined based on only one counter value, the ratio of the final stop display in the case of a specific jackpot is different for each specific symbol, or a non-specific jackpot In this case, there is a possibility that the ratio of the final stop display is different for each non-specific symbol. Certainly, if a jackpot type counter with more counter values is prepared, the above-mentioned concern can be solved, but this may lead to an increase in the storage capacity of the main controller 131.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2a used when determining the jackpot type and the jackpot used when determining the stop symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be finally stopped and displayed in the case of the jackpot When the symbol counter C2b is individually provided, the ratio of the specific jackpot occurrence to the jackpot occurrence and the stop pattern of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 that causes the specific jackpot occurrence to the stop pattern of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 that causes the jackpot occurrence Even if the ratio is different, each stop pattern can be evenly displayed in the final stop when the jackpot occurs without causing the above-mentioned concern.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which three types of display modes are provided and the winning probability of the promotion effect lottery is different for each display mode has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and there are two types of display modes. It is good also as a structure provided, and it is good also as a structure which has four or more types of display modes. Or it is good also as a structure which does not have a display mode, ie, cannot change a display mode. Even in these configurations, if the display control device 214 is configured to be able to change the reach symbol, it is obvious that the same operational effects as the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (B) In each of the above embodiments, the selection switch 108 is provided on the front side of the bulging portion 22 so that it can be operated by the player. However, for example, it is provided on the back side of the game board 30 to manage the game hall. The display mode may be selected. Alternatively, the display control device 214 may independently set any display mode without providing the selection switch 108. As a configuration in which the display control device 214 uniquely sets one of the display modes, for example, a configuration in which the display mode is changed every time a predetermined number of games are played, or the display mode is changed after the jackpot state is finished is considered. It is done.

  (C) In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of the selection switch 108 is invalidated when the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. However, the selection switch 108 is displayed while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed at a high speed. A configuration that enables the operation 108 may be adopted.

  (D) In each of the embodiments described above, the sound lamp control device 272 performs the drive control of the lamp built in the selection switch 108. However, it goes without saying that the display control device 214 may perform the drive control.

  (E) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 271 also performs a promotion lottery in the case of a specific jackpot, and when the promotion lottery is won, the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed. The main controller 271 does not have to perform the promotion lottery. That is, the main controller 271 determines the stop symbols of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 based on the value of the jackpot symbol table or each reach symbol buffer, and promotes the promotion effect lottery based on the stop symbol command received only by the display controller 214 The configuration is such that With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify display effects without increasing the processing inability of the main control device 271. However, in such a configuration, when a big hit occurs due to a normal reach fluctuation, a high probability state will occur if a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on one of the middle line L2, the right-down line L4, or the right-up line L5. The possibility of moving to is eliminated.

  In addition, the main control device 271 may be configured such that the promotion lottery is performed in the case of a specific jackpot but the promotion lottery is not performed in the case of a missed reach variation (the processing of steps S1005 to S1008 in the variation pattern determination process is not performed). The probability of winning the promotion lottery on the main controller 271 side in the case of a specific jackpot is about one-third, and the probability of winning the promotion effect lottery on the display controller 214 side in the second display mode or the third display mode Are about 1/5 and about 1/2, respectively. That is, in the case of a specific jackpot, the probability of changing the reach symbol on the main controller 271 side is lower than the probability of changing the reach symbol on the display controller 214 side. For this reason, if the display control device 214 is configured to change the reach design even in the case of out-of-bounds fluctuation, the expected value for generating a big hit varies depending on the reach design and reach line when the reach occurs. It becomes possible to suppress.

  (F) In each of the above-described embodiments, the reach design is changed on the display control device 214 side when the promotion effect lottery is won even in the case of an outreach change, but the reach design is changed in the case of an outreach change. It is good also as a structure which does not. However, in such a configuration, the expected value that will be a big hit when the reach by the specific symbol occurs in the left line L1 or the right line L3, conversely, the non-specification in these effective lines L1, L3 When the reach by design occurs, the expected value that will generate a jackpot will increase. For example, in the third display mode, since the reach symbol is changed in about one half of the case of the specific jackpot, the opportunity for the final stop display of the specific symbol combination on the left line L1 (right line L3) This results in about one third of the chance that the combination of non-specific symbols is displayed at L3 (left line L1). Therefore, when the reach on the left line L1 (right line L3) by the specific symbol and the reach on the right line L3 (left line L1) by the non-specific symbol are performed at the same frequency, the left line L1 (right line by the specific symbol) The ratio of the jackpot occurrence to the reach at L3) is about one third of the ratio of the jackpot occurrence to the reach at the right line L3 (left line L1) due to the non-specific symbol.

  In addition, in order to make the configuration in which the reach design is not changed in the case of the detachment reach variation on the display control device 214 side, for example, before confirming the display mode whether or not the jackpot variation pattern command is received in the promotion effect process (that is, If it is determined in step S2001) and it has not been received, the promotion effect process may be terminated without performing the promotion effect lottery.

  (G) In each of the above embodiments, when the winning lottery in the main controller 271 is won, the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set based on the previously stored promotion symbol table. Change as follows. First, referring to the jackpot symbol table, the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are set. After that, a promotion lottery is performed, and if winning is selected, the combination of non-specific symbols is the final combination of the symbols (reach symbols) of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the previously stopped symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Change to stop display. Even with such a configuration, it is obvious that the same operational effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (H) In the jackpot symbol determination process in the main controller 271, when a promotion lottery is won, a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on one of the middle line L2, the right-down line L4, and the right-up line L5. What is necessary is just the structure which can determine the stop symbol of each symbol sequence Z1-Z3. This is because, for the left line L1 or the right line L3, the reach symbol can be changed so that the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed in the promotion effect process in the display control device 214. That is, the main control device 271 does not set the stop symbol to the effective lines L2, L4, and L5 that cannot be set so that the combination of the non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the display control device 214 side when performing the promotion effect. Any configuration can be used as long as it can be determined to display the combination of the last stop display.

  (I) In each of the embodiments described above, the promotion effect lottery is performed with the same winning probability in both cases of jackpot fluctuation and outlier reach fluctuation, but in the case of jackpot fluctuation and outlier reach fluctuation It goes without saying that the winning probabilities for the promotion effect lottery may be different.

  (J) In each of the above embodiments, the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 can be changed on the display control device 214 side even in the case of super reach fluctuation, but can be changed only in the case of normal reach fluctuation. It is good also as a structure. Since the normal reach variation only displays the notice character with a predetermined probability, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 tends to be monotonous compared to the super reach variation in which the reach character is displayed. Therefore, if there is a configuration in which a promotion effect may be performed if a big hit occurs due to a normal reach fluctuation, the player is strongly expected that a big hit will occur when a normal reach fluctuation due to a non-specific design is performed It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to suppress the monotonization of a game suitably.

  (K) In the promotion effect process in each of the above embodiments, the stop symbol (reach symbol) of the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 is changed in the case of normal reach variation, and all symbol sequences in the case of super reach variation. Although it was set as the structure which changes the stop symbol of Z1-Z3, if it is a super reach change which does not change the speed of the last stop symbol sequence after the occurrence of reach, that is, does not rewrite the symbol of the final stop symbol sequence, It is only necessary to change the stop symbols (reach symbols) of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a promotion effect in the structure provided with only 1 type of reach, ie, only a normal reach fluctuation | variation. In such a configuration, if the main control device 271 outputs a variation pattern command indicating a variation display time and a lottery result command indicating a jackpot type, each symbol sequence Z1 on the display control device 214 side without outputting a stop symbol command. The stop symbols of ~ Z3 can be grasped.

  (L) In the first embodiment, there is a correspondence relationship between the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1 when the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. The determined jackpot symbol table is configured to be stored in the ROM 503. However, when the combination of the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the symbol symbols Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed on the display screen. It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the jackpot symbol table in which the corresponding | compatible relationship was defined in ROM503. That is, it is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the stop symbol of each symbol sequence Z1-Z3 made to stop-display on the left line L1, the middle line L2, and the right line L3. This applies not only to the jackpot symbol table but also to other symbol tables such as a promoted symbol table, a reach symbol table, and a normal reach symbol table on the display control device 214 side. Further, the symbol table such as the specific symbol table in the second embodiment may be configured to store the stop symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the middle line L2, and the right line L3. However, with these configurations, there is a concern that the data amount of the symbol table increases and the storage capacity of the ROM 503 is compressed.

  (M) In the first embodiment, the main controller 271 outputs display commands in the order of lottery result command → promotion command → variation pattern command → upper symbol command → middle symbol command → lower symbol command. The variation pattern command may be output first. In such a configuration, the display control device 214 can wait for input of another command while starting high-speed fluctuation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In addition, the main control device 271 may not output the lottery result command. This is because the display control device 214 can grasp whether or not it is a specific big hit from the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command. Needless to say, the main controller 271 may output a lottery result command in the second embodiment.

  (N) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration has been described in which the big prize opening is opened and closed a total of 15 times when shifting to the jackpot state, but the number of times of opening and closing is not limited to 15 times. Further, the timing of performing the promotion effect is not limited to the 15th round as the final round, and may be performed in the first round or the seventh round. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a promotion effect in several rounds, and it is good also as a structure which performs a promotion effect at the timing which displays an ending screen. Furthermore, when the jackpot state ends and the symbol variation display is started, or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 times) is played, the current gaming state is a high-probability state. Also good.

  (O) In each of the above embodiments, the promotion effect is performed only when the promotion flag is set. However, the configuration is changed. In other words, when a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed, a promotion challenge effect is provided to notify whether or not a specific jackpot has been made. As a promotion challenge effect, for example, a combination of non-specific symbols when a jackpot is generated is displayed again on the display screen under the jackpot state, and the combination of non-specific symbols is re-varied all at once. Then, if it is a specific jackpot, the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed to notify that it was a specific jackpot, and if it is a non-specific jackpot, the previously displayed non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed again. To inform you that it is not a specific jackpot. With this configuration, when a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and a jackpot is generated, a game in a jackpot state is performed with the expectation that the combination of the specific symbols will be stopped and displayed in promotion challenge production. It becomes possible to suppress the monotonization of the game. In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the probability of performing a promotion challenge production | presentation according to the display mode of the game time which became jackpot occurrence.

  (P) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed when a specific jackpot is reached, a promotion effect is provided to notify that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. However, it is not necessary to perform promotion promotion. In other words, when the promotion effect lottery is won, the state is shifted to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot state without notifying that the specific jackpot has been won. With this configuration, when a combination of non-specific symbols is displayed as a final stop and a jackpot is generated, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the jackpot state has shifted to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot state. It becomes possible to suitably suppress monotonization of the game.

  (Q) In each of the above-described embodiments, the promotion effect for notifying that a specific jackpot is made is used. However, the promotion effect for notifying that a transition to a high-probability state is made after the jackpot state ends may be performed. Needless to say.

  (R) In each of the above embodiments, when the premium effect lottery is won, the identification information to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 such as a premium notice character or premium reach character is set. However, the premium effect lottery is won. In such a case, a dedicated melody may be set only in a case where a special melody is set. In a configuration including a movable accessory, a dedicated movable mode may be set only when a premium effect lottery is won. In other words, any configuration that has a dedicated effect that is performed only when the premium effect lottery is won, and the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is not limited.

  (S) In the reach effect determination process in each of the above embodiments, the stop symbol of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 set in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 523 stops and displays a combination of specific symbols on any of the active lines. The premium effect lottery is configured so that the premium effect lottery is received when the stop symbol command indicating that the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines is received. It is good. In such a configuration, a premium effect will be performed even in a situation where a combination of non-specific symbols is displayed in the final stop, but since the promotion effect will notify that it was a special jackpot, the premium effect It is possible to prevent the player's gaming motivation from decreasing due to the final stop display of the combination of non-specific symbols despite the fact that the game has been performed.

  (T) In each of the embodiments described above, the configuration in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction has been described. It goes without saying that the configuration may be acceptable. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the three symbol sequences are variably displayed, and may be a configuration in which two symbol sequences are variably displayed or a configuration in which four or more symbol sequences are variably displayed.

  Furthermore, the symbols of the five symbol sequences are variably displayed as they are scrolled in a predetermined direction, and three symbols per symbol sequence are stopped and displayed on the display screen, of which three symbols are displayed. A configuration in which a jackpot is generated when a specific symbol combination is formed by the symbols in the row may be employed. In such a configuration, the variable display of the two symbol sequences at both ends is first stopped, then the variable display of the two inner symbol sequences is stopped, and finally the variable display of the central symbol sequence is stopped. In such a case, three patterns of 3 × 3 symbol sequences are displayed in the same manner as in the above embodiments, and the variation display time changes depending on the stop symbol of the center symbol sequence. If it is set as the structure which changes stop symbols (reach symbols) other than a row | line | column, there can exist an effect similar to the said embodiment.

  (U) In each of the above embodiments, the main symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 are arranged in descending order and the main symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged in ascending order. However, the present invention is limited to this configuration. Instead, the main symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 may be arranged in descending order and the main symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 may be arranged in ascending order. That is, it is sufficient if the arrangement of the main symbols in at least one symbol row is a reverse symbol order with respect to the other symbol rows.

  (V) In each of the above embodiments, the “4” symbol is arranged between the “9” symbol and the “1” symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, but the “4” symbol may not be arranged. However, in such a case, when the main controller 271 determines that the combination of “9” symbols is to be finally stopped and displayed on the left line L1, and when the combination of “1” symbols is to be finally stopped and displayed on the right line L3, When the control device 271 determines, the non-specific symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 do not stop on other effective lines. Therefore, when the main control device 271 makes the above determination, the reach control cannot be changed so that the combination of the non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the display control device 214 side, and a promotion effect can be performed. Opportunities will decrease.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to use a configuration in which the specific symbols and the non-specific symbols are alternately arranged, and a configuration in which no sub-design is arranged between the specific symbols and the non-specific symbols may be employed. In other words, when the specific symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops at a predetermined effective line, the display control device 214 side reaches the other effective line with an arrangement in which the non-specific symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 stop. Only a symbol can be changed and a combination of non-specific symbols can be finally stopped and displayed, and the same effect as the above embodiment can be achieved.

  (W) In the above embodiments, when a specific symbol stops on the left line L1 (right line L3), a non-specific symbol stops on the right line L3 (left line L1), and the reach symbol is changed on these effective lines. Although it was set as the possible structure, it is not limited to this structure. For example, in the case of a symbol arrangement in which a sub-design is not arranged between a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol, when the specific symbol stops on the left line L1, the non-specific symbol stops on the middle line L2. Therefore, when the specific symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is a specific jackpot that stops at the left line L1, the combination of non-specific symbols is finally stopped and displayed on any of the middle line L2, the right lowering line L4, and the right rising line L5. The reach design may be changed.

  (X) The display control device 214 in each of the above embodiments recognizes that the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot state based on the state transition command and which opening pattern is performed, and based on the opening command and the closing command. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration as long as the configuration is such that the opening / closing of each prize winning opening and the display of the symbol display device 41 are interlocked.

  (Y) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 271 outputs the change end command to the display control device 214 at the timing when the change display time has elapsed. However, the change end command need not be output. . In the configuration in which the variation pattern command indicating the variation display time is output, the display control device 214 can grasp the variation display time, and therefore, the passage of the variation display time determined by the main control device 271 without outputting the variation end command. This is because it is possible to achieve harmony between the timing and the symbol variation display end timing.

  (Z) In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type counter C2 (C2a in the second embodiment) used for determining the jackpot type are individually provided. The jackpot type counter C2 (C2a in the second embodiment) may not be provided. That is, it is determined whether or not a hit is made and whether it is a specific hit or a non-specific hit based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  For example, in the first embodiment, there are two random number values “337, 673” that are jackpots under normal conditions. Therefore, first, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “337, 673”, it is determined to be a win, and then the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is confirmed again, and if it is “337”, it is determined to be a specific hit. , “673” is determined to be a non-specific hit.

  Alternatively, if it is “337”, it is determined to be a specific hit, if “673”, it is determined to be a non-specific hit, and if it is any other value, it is determined to be out. In other words, the determination of the hit and the determination of the hit type may be performed in one process.

  (A1) In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine has been described that shifts to a jackpot state as a special gaming state when a specific jackpot occurs, and then transitions to a high probability state as a specific gaming state. It may be configured to shift to a gaming state other than the high probability state. For example, the special game state is shifted to a jackpot state in which a big winning opening / closing of 8 rounds is performed, and then the second game state is shifted to a second jackpot state in which a special round is opened / closed for 7 rounds. That is, it may be a pachinko machine in which the number of times of opening and closing the big prize opening is different between a specific jackpot and a non-specific jackpot. Or, as the specific gaming state, although the jackpot probability is not increased, the switching display time of the second specific lamp unit is shortened, or the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory provided to the operation port 33 are increased. It may be configured to shift to a high probability state.

  Furthermore, the specific gaming state may be configured to shift to a gaming state in which the player's degree of advantage is different between a specific jackpot and a non-specific jackpot. For example, it may be configured to shift to a high probability state in the case of a specific jackpot, but not to a high probability state in the case of a non-specific jackpot, but to shift to a high probability state until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are performed. . Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot, the state shifts to a high probability state until the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, and in the case of a non-specific jackpot, the configuration shifts to a high probability state until the symbol variation display is performed 30 times. Also good. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot, the game shifts to a high probability state in which the winning probability is 10 times higher than the normal gaming state until the symbol variation display is performed 100 times. In the case of a non-specific jackpot, the symbol variation display is 100 times. It is good also as a structure which transfers to the high-probability state whose winning probability doubles from a normal gaming state until it is performed. Needless to say, the number of games in which the state of high probability of an object continues may differ between a specific jackpot and a non-specific jackpot, and it goes without saying that these may be combined.

  As described above, in the case of non-specific hit, the game shifts to the first gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state, and in the case of specific hit, the player is more advantageous than the case of non-specific hit (first gaming state). Any configuration that shifts to the second gaming state may be used.

  (A2) In the above embodiments, the main controller 271 is configured to determine the stop symbols, symbol variation patterns, and reach types of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41, but this is changed. May be. For example, the main controller 271 determines the stop symbol and the variable display time of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 without determining the symbol variation pattern and reach type, and the display controller 214 determines the symbol variation pattern and reach type. The structure to determine may be sufficient. Even in such a configuration, as long as the display control device 214 can derive the symbol variation pattern based on the stop symbol and variation display time of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 determined by the main control device 271, the same as in the above embodiment. It is clear that there is an effect.

  Further, as in the second embodiment, when the variable display time, the fluctuation pattern, and the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 are uniquely associated, each symbol row Z1 to Z1 on the main controller 271 side. It is not necessary to determine the stop symbol of Z3. In such a configuration, if the main control device 271 outputs a lottery result command indicating whether it is a big win or a specific big win in addition to the variation pattern command, each symbol row Z1 on the display control device 214 side. The stop symbols of ~ Z3 can be grasped. For example, when a variation pattern command indicating that the variation display time is 16 seconds is output from the main control device 271, the display control device 214 indicates that there is a normal reach variation and the middle symbol sequence Z2 It can be understood that the “1” symbol stops on the left line L1. Therefore, in addition to this, if a specific command indicating a specific jackpot is output, the display control device 214 can grasp that the combination of the symbol “1” is finally stopped and displayed on the left line L1, If a non-specific command indicating that it is a non-specific big hit is output, the display controller 214 side can grasp that the combination of symbols “2” is finally stopped and displayed on the right line L3.

  (A3) In each of the above embodiments, the first specific lamp unit 47 is arranged above the display screen of the symbol display device 41, but it is arranged at another position. May be. For example, the 1st specific lamp part 47 may be the structure arrange | positioned in the out port 36 vicinity.

  (A4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the color switching display displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 is ended after the variable display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is ended. The change display of the color displayed on the 1st specific lamp part 47 may be complete | finished simultaneously with the fluctuation | variation display of -Z3 ending.

  (A5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the display of switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 47 is performed by repeatedly displaying the order of red, green, and blue, but this is changed. May be. For example, the above three colors may be displayed at random.

  (A6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first specific lamp unit 47 is provided separately from the symbol display device 41 that performs variable display of symbols. However, the first specific lamp unit 47 may not be provided. Further, the display control device 214 directly receives the display command transmitted from the main control device 271 and controls the display of the symbol display device 41. However, the display control device 214 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 271. It may be configured to receive indirectly. For example, the main control device 271 transmits a display command to the sound lamp control device 272, and the sound lamp control device 272 transmits a control command to the display control device 214 based on the received display command. The display control device 214 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the control command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 272. Alternatively, the main control device 271 transmits a display command to the sub-control device, and the sub-control device transmits a control command to the display control device 214 and the sound lamp control device 272 based on the received display command. The display control device 214 and the sound lamp control device 272 control the symbol display device 41 and the lamps based on the control command transmitted from the sub control device.

  (A7) It goes without saying that the time for performing high-speed fluctuation of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed according to the lighting state of the holding lamp 44. For example, in a situation where the hold lamp 44 is not lit, high speed fluctuation is performed for 4 seconds, and in a situation where four hold lamps 44 are lit, high speed fluctuation is performed for 2 seconds.

  (A8) In each of the above embodiments, in the case of double reach super reach fluctuation, when the “1” symbol stops as the reach symbol on the right descending line L4 and when the “5” symbol stops, the reach reaches the right ascending line L5. When the “3” symbol is stopped as the symbol and when the “9” symbol is stopped, the reach symbol is not changed. Needless to say, the reach symbol may be changed. However, when the “5” symbol stops as the reach symbol on the right-down line L4 and when the “3” symbol stops as the reach symbol on the right-up line L5, the “4” symbol reaches the other effective line. Since two “4” symbols are arranged in the middle symbol row Z2, so-called triple reach is achieved. Therefore, it is desirable not to change the reach design in these reach.

  (A9) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 having a relatively large game area as compared with the prior art has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game such as a pachinko machine having a game area, a window, or the like as in the past. It can also be applied to machines. In addition, other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as so-called type 3 pachinko machines that generate a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, and other accessories are provided. It can also be applied to pachinko machines such as pachinko machines and pachinko machines that combine these configurations. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a storage device for storing and storing a prize ball to be paid out to a player as a virtual game medium.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands or shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the front structure of the main body frame which comprises a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a front door frame. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the back surface structure of a pachinko machine for every main part. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the 1st control board unit in the back surface of a pachinko machine, a 2nd control board unit, and a back pack unit. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a main body frame and a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a main body frame. It is a perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a bearing metal fitting. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 1st control board unit. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a 1st control board unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st control board unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a 1st control board unit. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd control board unit. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a 2nd control board unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd control board unit. It is a front view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back pack unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a tank rail. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a design individually. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of an off symbol counter. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st specific lamp part control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot symbol determination process. (A) is a figure which shows a jackpot symbol table, (b) is a figure which shows a promotion symbol table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a timing chart which shows the correlation with the switching display of the color displayed on the 1st specific lamp part, and the display of the fluctuation | variation of the symbol in a symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a lending ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a display mode change process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol position adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows a promotion effect process. (A) is a figure which shows the symbol table for normal reach, (b) is a figure which shows an example in case a jackpot occurs by the combination of a specific symbol. It is a figure which shows the design table for super reach. It is a flowchart which shows reach production determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot display process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit time process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern command in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol position adjustment process in 2nd Embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 12 ... Body frame, 13 ... Front door frame, 30 ... Game board, 32 ... Variable winning device as a variable pitching device, 33 ... Actuator, 35 ... Variable Display unit 38 ... Notch, 41 ... Symbol display device as a picture display device, 47 ... First specific lamp part, 48 ... Second specific lamp part, 50 ... Rail unit, 91 ... Cylinder lock, 101 ... Window part, 214 ... display control device including standby fluctuation display means, standby picture change means, etc., 235 ... bearing bracket, 248 ... interlocking rod, 271 ... main control device including determination means, stop picture determination means, etc., 311 ... payout control device.

Claims (1)

A pattern display device that displays the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen;
A main control means for overall management of the game;
Display control means for controlling display of the picture display device under the control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
A determination means for performing a predetermined determination;
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the stop picture to be displayed for final stop is determined, and when the determination result of the determination means is the first result, the specific picture is finally stopped and displayed. When the determination result is the second result, stop pattern determining means for determining the stop pattern so that the non-specific pattern is finally stopped and displayed,
Fluctuation display time determining means for determining a variable display time until the picture is finally stopped and displayed,
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result or the second result and the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed, the special game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a state;
When the determination result of the determination means is the first result, after the end of the special gaming state, the specification for shifting to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when the determination result of the determination means is the second result Game state transition means,
The display control unit is configured to end the variation display of the pattern within the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination unit, and based on the determination result of the stop pattern determination unit at the elapse timing of the variation display time. In the gaming machine that controls the display of the pattern display device so that the stopped pattern is displayed as a final stop,
The main control means transmits a determination result command indicating at least a part of the determination result of the determination means and a stop pattern command indicating the stop pattern determined by the stop pattern determination means to the display control means. A transmission means,
The display control means includes identification information display means for displaying predetermined identification information on the display screen until the design is finally stopped and displayed, and the display based on the commands transmitted from the command transmission means. An identification information determining means for determining identification information to be displayed on the screen,
When the identification information determination means receives a determination result command indicating that it is the first result and a stop pattern command indicating that the specific pattern is to be displayed as a final stop, and when a predetermined lottery is won A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to display specific identification information as long as possible.

Images